Philips User Manual 32pfs6402 12 Dfu Eng
32PFS6402/12 Instrukcja obsługi 32pfs6402_12_dfu_eng Niezwykle smukÅy telewizor Full HD z syst. Android⢠32PFS6402/12 | Philips32PFS6402/12
User Manual: Philips User Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 211
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Register your product and get support at
6402 series
www.philips.com/welcome
User Manual
32PFS6402
Contents
1 What's new
4
9 Internet
4
1.1 All-in-one source menu
1.2 Top picks
4
1.3 Media browser
5
2 Setting Up
10 TV Menu
6
6
11 Sources
12 Settings
3.1 Key Overview
8
3.2 Voice Search
9
3.3 IR Sensor
10
3.4 Batteries
10
3.5 Cleaning
10
11
12
5.1 Satellite Installation
12
5.2 Antenna/Cable Installation
5.3 Channel List Copy
16
5.4 About Channels
17
6 Connect Devices
44
44
46
56
61
13.1 From a USB Connection
61
13.2 From a Computer or NAS
61
13.3 From a Cloud Storage Service
61
13.4 Favourites, Most Popular, Last Played menu
61
6.1 About Connections
23
6.2 HDMI Ports
23
6.3 Y Pb Pr - Component
24
6.4 Scart
24
6.5 Audio Out - Optical
25
6.6 CAM with Smart Card - CI+
25
6.7 Home Theatre System - HTS
26
6.8 Smartphones and Tablets
26
6.9 Blu-ray Disc Player
27
6.10 DVD Player
27
6.11 Bluetooth - Speakers and Gamepads
6.12 Headphones
28
6.13 Game Console
28
6.14 Gamepad
29
6.15 USB Hard Drive
29
6.16 USB Keyboard
30
6.17 USB Flash Drive
30
6.18 Photo Camera
31
6.19 Camcorder
31
6.20 Computer
31
61
62
62
13.5 Play your Videos
13.6 View your Photos
13.7 Play your Music
14 TV Guide
64
14.1 What You Need
64
14.2 TV Guide Data
64
14.3 Using the TV Guide
64
15 Recording and Pause TV
15.1 Recording
15.2 Pause TV
27
16.1 Philips TV Remote App
16.2 Google Cast
68
16.3 AirPlay
68
16.4 MHL
68
17 Games
69
17.1 What You Need
17.2 Play a Game
33
18 Ambilight
8 Apps
19 Top Picks
69
69
70
18.1 Ambilight Style
70
18.2 Ambilight Off
70
18.3 Ambilight Settings
70
38
72
19.1 About Top Picks
72
19.2 Now on TV
72
19.3 TV on Demand
72
19.4 Video on Demand
72
39
20 Netflix
21 Multi View
2
66
66
67
16 Smartphones and Tablets
7.1 Network and Internet
33
7.2 Google Account
35
7.3 Philips App Gallery
36
7.4 Android Settings
36
7.5 Home Menu
37
8.1 About Apps
38
8.2 Google Play
38
8.3 Start or Stop an App
8.4 Lock Apps
39
8.5 Manage Apps
40
8.6 Storage
41
44
13 Videos, Photos and Music
14
23
7 Connect your Android TV
43
43
12.1 Frequent Settings
46
12.2 Picture
46
12.3 Sound
49
12.4 Ambilight Settings
52
12.5 Eco Settings
54
12.6 General Settings
54
12.7 Clock, Region and Language
12.8 Universal Access
59
12.9 Child Lock
60
4.1 On or Standby
11
4.2 Keys on TV
11
5 Channels
43
11.1 Switch to a device
44
11.2 Options for a TV Input
11.3 Device Name and Type
11.4 Computer
44
8
4 Switching On and Off
42
10.1 About TV Menu
10.2 Open TV Menu
2.1 Read Safety
6
2.2 TV Stand and Wall Mounting
2.3 Tips on Placement
6
2.4 Power Cable
6
2.5 Antenna Cable
7
2.6 Satellite Dish
7
3 Remote Control
42
9.1 Start Internet
42
9.2 Options on Internet
74
75
68
68
21.1 Text and TV
75
21.2 HDMI and TV
75
21.3 Nettv and TV
75
21.4 Nettv and HDMI
75
22 Software
76
22.1 Update Software
76
22.2 Software Version
76
22.3 Open Source Software
76
22.4 Open Source License
76
22.5 Announcements
196
23 Specifications
197
23.1 Environmental
197
23.2 Power
197
23.3 Operating System
197
23.4 Reception
198
23.5 Display Type
198
23.6 Display Input Resolution
23.7 Dimensions and Weights
23.8 Connectivity
198
23.9 Sound
199
23.10 Multimedia
199
24 Help and Support
198
198
200
24.1 Register your TV
200
24.2 Using Help
200
24.3 Troubleshooting
200
24.4 Online Help
202
24.5 Support and Repair
202
25 Safety and Care
25.1 Safety
203
25.2 Screen Care
26 Terms of Use
203
204
205
26.1 Terms of Use - TV
205
26.2 Terms of Use - Philips App Gallery
27 Copyrights
205
206
27.1 MHL
206
27.2 HDMI
206
27.3 Dolby Audio
206
27.4 DTS 2.0+Digital Out ™
206
27.5 Microsoft
206
27.6 Wi-Fi Alliance
206
27.7 Kensington
206
27.8 Other Trademarks
207
28 Disclaimer regarding services and/or
software offered by third parties 208
Index
209
3
1
What's new
1.1
All-in-one source menu
About All-in-one source menu
For the first time you press SOURCES, you can
see instructions how to set your source menu.
The improved source menu contains normal source
menu, easily open TV Guide, and also you can
use (plus key) to set a reminder or schedule a
recording in TV Guide.
Improved TV guide
A clear and better looking TV guide. Select a
programme and read the programme info or
press to set a reminder or schedule a recording.
An all-in-one Sources menu, a restyled TV guide and
a new easy programme browser.
Your list of favourite channels is now part of
the Sources menu. Same for the channel lists of
both tuners Antenna/Cable and Satellite.
The new Sources menu will have all connected
devices in the list but also all tuners, so in the
Sources menu the user will find all possible ‘sources’
for TV.
1.2
Top picks
With TOP PICKS your TV recommends current
TV programmes, the latest rental videos and Online
TV services for you to watch.
1 - Press TOP PICKS.
2 - Select one programme and use (plus key) to
schedule a recording, set a reminder or watch the
programme.
3 - Use Arrow / navigation keys to select 3 dots on
the right-top of the screen, then press OK to
open OPTIONS menu.
Switch from tuner, channel, and TV
guide
Select a tuner source and press to open the list of
channels. Press again to open the TV guide
to see what’s on. Press to return to the list of
channels.
Select to record, or select
4
to set a reminder
4 - When playing, there is a secondary control bar on
the bottom of the screen, use the arrows
and OK key to select what you want.
Select to mark as favourites
1.3
Media browser
Browse your media as you like it or mark any channel,
song or photo as a favourite easily.
1 - Press (plus key) to mark any video, song or
photo as a favourite.
2 - You can view videos, songs, and photos in grid
view or list view.
3 - Use Arrow / navigation keys to select 3 dots on
the right-top of the screen, then press OK to
open OPTIONS menu.
Grid view
List view
5
VESA MIS-F 400x200, M6
• 55PUS6432, 55PUS6452
VESA MIS-F 400x200, M6
2
Setting Up
Preparation
2.1
First remove the 4 plastic screw caps out of the
threaded bushes on the back of the TV.
Make sure that the metal screws, to mount the TV to
the VESA-compliant bracket, go about 10mm deep
inside the threaded bushes of the TV.
Read Safety
Read the safety instructions first before you use the
TV.
Caution
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Safety Instructions.
Wall mounting the TV requires special skills and
should only be performed by qualified personnel. The
TV wall mounting should meet safety standards
according to the TVs weight. Also read the safety
precautions before positioning the TV.
TP Vision Europe B.V. bears no responsibility for
improper mounting or any mounting that results in
accident or injury.
2.2
TV Stand and Wall Mounting
TV Stand
You can find the instructions for mounting the TV
stand in the Quick Start Guide that came with the TV.
In case you lost this guide, you can download it
from www.philips.com.
2.3
Tips on Placement
Use the model number of the TV to look for
the Quick Start Guide to download.
• Position the TV where light does not shine directly
on the screen.
• Position the TV up to 15 cm away from the wall.
• The ideal distance to watch TV is 3 times its diagonal
screen size. When seated, your eyes should be level
with the centre of the screen.
Wall Mounting
Your TV is also prepared for a VESA-compliant wall
mount bracket (sold separately).
Use the following VESA code when purchasing the
wall mount . . .
15
cm
2.4
Power Cable
• Insert the power cable into the POWER connector
on the back of the TV.
• Make sure the power cable is securely inserted in
the connector.
• Make sure that the power plug, in the wall socket, is
accessible at all times.
• When you unplug the power cable, always pull the
plug, never pull the cable.
• 32PFS6402
VESA MIS-F 100x100, M4
• 43PUS6432, 43PUS6452
VESA MIS-F 200x200, M6
• 49PUS6432, 49PUS6452
6
Although this TV has a very low standby power
consumption, unplug the power cable to save energy
if you do not use the TV for a long period of time.
2.5
Antenna Cable
Insert the antenna plug firmly into
the Antenna socket at the back of the TV.
You can connect your own antenna or an antenna
signal from an antenna distribution system. Use an
IEC Coax 75 Ohm RF antenna connector.
Use this antenna connection for DVB-T and DVB-C
input signals.
2.6
Satellite Dish
Attach the satellite F-type connector to the satellite
connection SAT at the back of the TV.
7
3
Remote Control
3.1
Key Overview
Top
1 TV Menu
To open the TV Menu with typical TV functions.
2 - SOURCES
To open the Sources menu.
3 - Colour keys
Direct selection of options.
1 - Standby / On
To switch the TV on or back to Standby.
4 - INFO
To open or close programme info.
2 - Playback and Record
• Play , to playback.
• Pause , to pause playback
• Stop , to stop playback
• Rewind , to rewind
• Fast forward , to go fast forward
• Record , to start recording
5 - BACK
To switch back to the previous channel you selected.
To return to previous menu.
To go back to the previous App/Internet page.
3 - Ambilight
To select one of the Ambilight style.
7 - OPTIONS
To open or close the Options menu.
4 - TV GUIDE
To open or close the TV Guide.
8 - OK key
To confirm a selection or setting. To open the channel
list while watching TV.
6 - - EXIT
To switch back to watch TV. To stop an interactive TV
application.
5 - LIST
To open or close the channel list.
9 - Arrow / navigation keys
To navigate up, down, left or right.
6 - Settings
To open the Frequent Settings.
10 - HOME
To open the Home menu.
7 - TOP PICKS
To open the menu with recommended programmes,
Video on Demand (Rental Videos) or Online TV
(Catch Up TV).
If available.
Bottom
8 - SEARCH
To open the searches page.
Middle
8
Pairing with Your TV
There is no microphone on your remote control, if you
want to use voice search, you must install Android
TV Remote Control app on your Android smartphone
or tablet first.
1 - On your Android smartphone or tablet, search
"Android TV Remote Control" in Google Play store.
2 - Download and install Android TV Remote
Control app* on your Android smartphone or
tablet .
3 - Connect your Android smartphone or tablet to
the same network as your Android TV device.
4 - Select "PhilipsTv"** on your Android smartphone
or tablet, then your Android TV will show a code on
the screen.
5 - Enter the code on your Android smartphone or
tablet to pair to your Android TV.
1-
To open the Netflix App directly. With the TV switched
on or from standby.
*You need an Android phone or tablet running
Android 4.3 or higher to use the Android TV Remote
Control app.
2 - Volume
To adjust the volume level.
3 - Number keys
To select a channel directly.
**The name of your Android TV is depends on the
name you set in TV Network Name. The pre-set
name is model name of this TV.
4 - SUBTITLE
To switch subtitles on, off or to show automatically.
.
5 - Channel
To switch to the next or previous channel in the
channel list. To open the next or previous page in
Text/Teletext. To start the next or previous chapter on
a disc.
Using Voice Search
You can search for videos, music or anything else on
the Internet with the icon at the top of the Home
menu. You can start using Voice Search any
time. Alternatively, you can use the remote control
keyboard to enter text.
6 - Mute
To mute the sound or to restore it.
7 - TEXT
To open or close Text/Teletext.
To use Voice Search…
1 - Tap icon on your smartphone to start a voice
search.
2 - The icon is red on screen, the microphone is
active.
3 - Speak out clearly what you are looking for. It
might take some time for the results to appear.
4 - In the screen with search results, you can select
the item you want.
3.2
Voice Search
Download App from Google play
Use your Android smartphone or tablet as a remote
for your Android TV. Easily switch between d-pad,
touchpad, and gamepad modes to navigate content
and play games on your Android TV device. Tap the
microphone to start a voice search, or use the
keyboard to input text on Android TV.
See also www.support.google.com/androidtv
To get started, connect your Android phone or tablet
to the same network as your Android TV device or
find your Android TV via bluetooth.
Voice Search settings
You can set the language you like to use with Voice
Search.
Works with all Android TV devices.
To set the language for Voice Search…
*You need an Android phone or tablet running
Android 4.3 or higher to use the Android TV Remote
Control app.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
9
3 - Select Preferences > Speech and
press OK.
4 - Select the language you want to use and
press OK.
5 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
3.3
IR Sensor
The TV can receive commands from a remote control
that uses IR (infrared) to send commands. If you use
such a remote control, always make sure you point
the remote control at the infrared sensor on the front
of the TV.
Warning
Do not put any objects in front of IR sensor of the TV,
it may block the IR signal.
3.4
Batteries
If the TV does not react on a key press on the remote
control, the batteries might be empty.
To replace the batteries, open the battery
compartment on the back of the remote control.
1 - Slide the battery door in the direction shown by
the arrow.
2 - Replace the old batteries with 2
type AAA-R03-1.5V batteries. Make sure the + and
the - ends of the batteries line up correctly.
3 - Reposition the battery door and slide it back until
it clicks.
Remove the batteries if you are not using the remote
control for a long time.
Safely dispose of your old batteries according to the
end of use directions.
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up End of use.
3.5
Cleaning
Your remote control is treated with a scratch-resistant
coating.
To clean the remote control, use a soft damp cloth.
Never use substances such as alcohol, chemicals or
household cleaners on the remote control.
10
movie.
4 - The menu will disappear automatically.
4
Switching On and
Off
To switch the TV on standby, select and press the
joystick key.
4.1
On or Standby
Make sure the TV is connected to the mains AC
power. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC
in connector at the back of the TV. The indicator light
at the bottom of the TV lights up.
Switch on
Press on the remote control to switch the TV
on. Alternatively, press HOME. You can also
press the small joystick key on the back of the TV to
switch the TV on in case you can't find the remote
control or its batteries are empty.
Switch to standby
To switch the TV to standby, press on the remote
control. You can also press the small joystick key on
the back of the TV.
In standby mode, the TV is still connected to the
mains power but consumes very little energy.
To switch off the TV completely, disconnect the
power plug.
When disconnecting the power plug, always pull the
power plug, never the cord. Ensure that you have full
access to the power plug, power cord and outlet
socket at all times.
4.2
Keys on TV
If you lost the remote control or its batteries are
empty, you can still do some basic TV operations.
To open the basic menu…
1 - With the TV switched on, press the joystick key on
the back of the TV to bring up the basic menu.
2 - Press left or right to
select Volume, Channel or Sources.
Select Demo, to start a demo movie.
3 - Press up or down to adjust the volume or tune to
the next or previous channel. Press up or down to go
through the list of sources, including the tuner
selection. Press the joystick key to start the demo
11
5
Satellite Installation Settings
Channels
The satellite installation settings are preset according
your country. These settings determine how the TV
searches and installs satellites and its channels. You
can always change these settings.
5.1
Satellite Installation
To change the satellite installation settings…
About Installing Satellites
1 - Start the satellite installation.
2 - On the screen where you can start searching for
satellites, select Settings and press OK.
3 - Select the number of satellites you want to install
or select one of the Unicable systems. When you
select Unicable, you can choose the User Band
Numbers and enter the User Band Frequencies for
each tuner.
4 - When you're done, select Next and press OK.
5 - On the Settings menu, press OK to return to the
screen to start searching for satellites.
Up to 4 Satellites
You can install up to 4 satellites (4 LNBs) on this TV.
Select the exact number of satellites you wish to
install at the start of the installation. This will speed up
the installation.
Unicable
You can use a Unicable system to connect the
antenna dish to the TV. You can select Unicable for 1
or for 2 satellites at the start of the installation.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
Start the Installation
Make sure your satellite dish is connected correctly
and is perfectly aligned before you start the
installation.
To start the satellite installation…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation. Enter
your PIN code if necessary.
3 - Select Search for Satellite.
4 - Select Search. TV will search for satellites.
5 - Select Install. The TV shows the current satellite
installation setup.
If you want to change this setup, select Settings.
If you don't want to change the setup, select Search.
Go to step 5.
Satellite CAMs
If you use a CAM – a Conditional Access Module with
a smart card – to watch satellite channels, we
recommend to do the satellite installation with the
CAM inserted in the TV.
Most CAMs are used to descramble channels.
Newest generation CAMs (CI+ 1.3 with Operator
Profile), can install all the satellite channels by
themselves on your TV. The CAM will invite you to
install its satellite(s) and channels. These CAMs not
only install and descramble the channels but also
handle regular channel updates.
6 - In Installation System, select the number of
satellites you want to install or select one of the
Unicable systems. When you select Unicable, you
can choose the User Band Numbers and enter the
User Band Frequencies for each tuner. In some
countries, you can adjust some expert settings for
each LNB in More Settings.
7 - The TV will search for the satellites available on
the alignment of your antenna dish. This may take a
few minutes. If a satellite is found, its name and
reception strength are shown on screen.
8 - When the TV found the satellites you need,
select Install.
9 - If a satellite offers Channel Packages, the TV will
show the available packages for that satellite. Select
the package you need.
10 - To store the satellite setup and installed
channels and radio stations, select Done.
Channel Packages
Satellite operators can offer channel packages that
bundle free channels (free-to-air) and offer a sorting
that suits a country. Some satellites offer subscription
packages - a collection of channels you pay for.
12
Unicable Setup
Add a Satellite
The Unicable System
You can add an additional satellite to your current
satellite installation. The installed satellites and their
channels remain untouched. Some satellite operators
do not allow adding a satellite.
You can use a Single Cable system, MDU or Unicable
system to connect the antenna dish to the TV. A
Single Cable system uses one cable to connect the
satellite dish to all satellite tuners in its system. A
Single Cable system is typically used in apartment
buildings. If you use a Unicable system, the TV will ask
you to assign a user band number and corresponding
frequency during the installation. You can install 1 or 2
satellites with Unicable on this TV.
The additional satellite should be seen as an extra, it
is not your main satellite subscription or not the main
satellite of which you use its channel package.
Typically, you would add a 4th satellite when you
have 3 satellites already installed. If you have 4
satellites installed, you might consider removing one
first to be able to add a new satellite.
If you notice some missing channels after a Unicable
installation, another installation might have been
done at the same moment on the Unicable system.
Do the installation again to install the missing
channels.
Setup
If you currently have only 1 or 2 satellites installed, the
current installation settings might not allow adding an
extra satellite. If you need to change the installation
settings, you must redo the complete satellite
installation. You cannot use Add satellite if a change
of settings is needed.
User Band Number
In a Unicable system, each connected satellite tuner
must be numbered (e.g. 0, 1, 2 or 3 etc.).
To add a satellite…
You can find the available user bands and their
number on the Unicable switchbox. User band is
sometimes shortened as UB. There are Unicable
switchboxes that offer 4 or 8 user bands. If you select
Unicable in the settings, the TV will ask you to assign
the unique user band number for each built-in
satellite tuners. A satellite tuner cannot have the same
user band number as another satellite tuner in the
Unicable system.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation.
3 - Select Search for satellite.
4 - Select Add Satellite. The current satellites are
shown.
5 - Select Search. The TV will search for new
satellites.
6 - If the TV has found one or more satellites,
select Install. The TV installs the channels of the
found satellites.
7 - Select Finish and press OK to store the
channels and radio stations.
User Band Frequency
Next to the unique user band number, the built-in
satellite receiver needs the frequency of the selected
user band number. These frequencies are mostly
shown next to the user band number on a Unicable
switchbox.
Remove a Satellite
You can always start an channel update yourself.
You can remove one or more satellites from your
current satellite installation. You remove the satellite
and its channels. Some satellite operators do not
allow removing a satellite.
To start a channel update manually…
To remove satellites…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation.
3 - Select Search for Channels.
4 - Select Update Channels. The TV will start
updating. The update may take a few minutes.
5 - Follow the instructions on screen. The update
may take a few minutes.
6 - Select Finish and press OK.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation.
3 - Select Search for satellite.
4 - Select Remove Satellite. The current satellites
are shown.
5 - Select a satellite and press OK to mark or
unmark them to remove.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Manual Channel Update
13
Manual Installation
Problems
Manual Installation is intended for expert users.
The TV cannot find the satellites I want or the TV
You can use Manual Installation to quickly add new
channels from a satellite transponder. You need to
know the frequency and polarization of the
transponder. The TV will install all channels of that
transponder. If the transponder was installed before,
all its channels - the former and the new ones - are
moved to the end of the channel list All.
You cannot use Manual installation if you need to
change the number of satellites. If this is needed, you
have to do a complete installation with Install
Satellites.
installs the same satellite twice
• Make sure that the correct number of satellites is set
in Settings at the start of the installation. You can set
the TV to search for One, Two or 3/4 satellites.
A dual head LNB cannot find a second satellite
• If the TV finds one satellite but cannot find a second
one, turn the dish a few degrees. Align the dish to get
the strongest signal on the first satellite. Check the
signal strength indicator of the first satellite on screen.
With the first satellite set at the strongest signal, select
Search again to find the second satellite.
• Make sure the settings are set to Two Satellites.
To install a transponder…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation.
3 - Select Manual Installation and press (right)
to enter the menu.
4 - If you have more than 1 satellite installed,
select LNB for which you want to add channels.
5 - Set the Polarisation you need. If you set
the Symbol Rate Mode to Manual, you can enter
the symbol rate in Symbol Rate manually.
6 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the frequency, and select Done.
7 - Select Search and press OK. The signal
strenght is shown on screen.
8 - If you want to store the channels of a new
transponder, select Store and press OK.
9 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Changing the installation settings did not solve my
problem
• All settings, satellites and channels are only stored
at the end of the installation when you finish.
All satellite channels are gone
• If you use a Unicable system, make sure you
assigned two unique user band numbers for both
built-in tuners in the Unicable settings. It might be
that another satellite receiver in your Unicable system
is using the same user band number.
Some satellite channels seem to have disappeared
from the channel list
• If some channels seem to be gone or displaced, the
broadcaster might have changed the transponder
location of these channels. To restore the channel
positions in the channel list, you can try an update of
the channel package.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
I cannot remove a satellite
LNB Power
• Check if the satellite dish is solidly mounted. Strong
winds can move the dish.
• Snow and rain can degrade the reception.
• Subscription packages do not allow removing a
satellite. To remove the satellite, you have to do a
complete installation again and select another
package.
Sometimes the reception is poor
By default, LNB Power is set to On.
22 kHz Tone
By default, the Tone is set to Auto.
5.2
Low LO Frequency / High LO Frequency
Antenna/Cable Installation
The local oscillator frequencies are set to standard
values. Adjust the values only in case of exceptional
equipment that needs different values.
14
Update Channels
Reinstall All Channels
Automatic Channel Update
You can reinstall all channels and leave all other TV
settings untouched.
If you receive digital channels, you can set the TV to
automatically update these channels.
If a PIN code is set, you will need to enter this code
before you can reinstall channels.
Once a day, at 6 AM, the TV updates the channels
and stores new channels. New channels are stored in
the Channels List and are marked with a .
Channels without a signal are removed. The TV must
be in standby to automatically update channels. You
can switch off Automatic Channel Update.
To reinstall channels…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels.
5 - Select Start and press OK.
6 - Select Reinstall Channels, select Next and
press OK.
7 - Select the country where you are now and
press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
9 - Select the type of installation you want, Antenna
(DVB-T) or Cable (DVB-C) and press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
11 - Select the type of channels you want, Digital
and Analogue Channels or Only Digital
Channels and press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
13 - Select Start and press OK to update the
digital channels. This can take a few minutes.
14 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
To switch off the automatic update…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Automatic Channel Update.
5 - Select Off.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
When new channels are found or if channels are
updated or removed, a message is shown at TV start
up. To avoid this message to appear after every
channel update, you can switch it off.
To switch off the message…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Channel Update Message.
5 - Select Off.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
DVB-T or DVB-C
DVB Settings
In certain countries, the Automatic channel update is
done while watching TV or on any moment when the
TV is in standby.
Network Frequency Mode
If you intend to use the fast Quick Scan method
in Frequency Scan to search for channels,
select Automatic. The TV will use 1 of the predefined
network frequencies (or HC - homing channel) as
used by most cable operator in your country.
Manual Channel Update
You can always start an channel update yourself.
If you received a specific network frequency value to
search for channels, select Manual.
To start a channel update manually…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels.
5 - Select Start.
6 - Select Update Digital Channels, select Next.
7 - Select Start to update the digital channels. This
can take a few minutes.
8 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Network Frequency
With the Network Frequency Mode set to Manual,
you can enter the network frequency value received
from your cable operator here. To enter the value, use
the number keys.
15
signal quality of this frequency. The test result is
shown on screen. You can reposition the antenna or
check the connections to possibly improve the
reception.
7 - You can also change the frequency
yourself. Select the frequency number one by one
and use the (up) or (down) keys to change
the value. Select Search and press OK to test the
reception again.
8 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Frequency Scan
Select the method of searching for channels. You can
select the faster Quick Scan method and use the
predefined settings used by most cable operator in
your country.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can select the
extended Full Scan method. This method will take
more time to search for and install channels.
Frequency Step Size
Manual Installation
The TV searches for channels in steps of 8MHz.
Analogue TV channels can be manually installed,
channel by channel.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can search in smaller
steps of 1MHz. Using the 1MHz steps will take more
time to search for and install channels.
To install analogue channels manually…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
Enter your PIN code if necessary.
3 - Select Analogue: Manual Installation.
Digital Channels
• System
To set up the TV system, select System.
Select your country or the part of the world where
you are now and press OK.
If you know your cable operator is not offering digital
channels, you can skip searching for digital channels.
• Search Channel
To find a channel, select Search Channel. You can
enter a frequency yourself to find a channel or let the
TV search for a channel. Press (right) to
select Search to search for a channel
automatically. The found channel is shown on screen
and if the reception is poor, press Search again. If
you want to store the channel, select Done and
press OK.
Analogue Channels
If you know your cable operator is not offering
analogue channels, you can skip searching for
analogue channels.
Free / Scrambled
If you have a subscription and a CAM - Conditional
Access Module for pay TV services, select Free +
Scrambled. If you did not subscribe to pay TV
channels or services, you can select Free
Channels Only .
• Store
You can store the channel on the current channel
number or as a new channel number.
Select Store Current Channel or Store as New
Channel. The new channel number is shown briefly.
You can redo these steps until you have found all
available analogue TV channels.
Reception Quality
You can check the quality and signal strength of a
digital channel. If you have your own antenna, you
can reposition the antenna to try and improve the
reception.
5.3
Channel List Copy
To check the reception quality of a digital channel…
Copy a Channel List
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable Installation.
Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Digital: Reception Test.
5 - Select Search. The digital frequency is shown
for this channel.
6 - Select Search again and press OK to check the
To copy a channel list…
1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels
installed.
2 - Plug in a USB flash drive.
3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy.
5 - Select Copy to USB. You might be asked to enter
16
the Child Lock PIN code to copy the channel list.
6 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash
drive.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
done, continue with step 2.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy
to TV. Enter your PIN code if necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
Now you can upload the copied channel list onto
another Philips TV.
Channel List version
5.4
Check the current version of the channel list...
About Channels
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Channel List Copy and select Current
Version, then press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Channel Lists
About Channel Lists
After a channel installation, all channels appear on
the channel list. Channels are shown with their name
and logo if this information is available.
For each type of tuner - Antenna/Cable (DVB-T/C) or
Satellite (DVB-S) - there is a channel list with all
installed channels. You can only filter this list to show
TV or only Radio channels. Or when you have several
satellites installed, you can filter the channels per
satellite.
Upload a Channel List
To not Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
With a channel list selected, press the
arrows (up) or (down) to select a channel,
then press OK to watch the selected channel. You
only tune to the channels in that list when
using or keys.
To a TV that is not yet installed
1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and
select language and country. You can skip the
channel search. Finish the installation.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy
to TV. Enter your PIN code if necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
Channel icons
After an Automatic Channel Update of the channel
list, newly found channels are marked with
a (star).
If you lock a channel, it will be marked with
a (lock).
The 3 most popular channels being watched by
others at this moment are marked with a 1, 2 or 3.
Radio stations
To Installed TVs
If digital broadcasting is available, digital radio
stations are installed during installation. Switch to a
radio channel just like you switch to a TV channel. A
Cable (DVB-C) channel installation usually places
radio stations from channel number 1001 onwards.
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To an already installed TV
1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this
setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this
procedure until you reach the country setting.
Press BACK to cancel the installation.)
If the country is correct continue with step 2.
If the country is not correct, you need to start a
reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and
start the installation. Select the correct country and
skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When
This TV can receive digital television standard DVB .
TV may not work properly with some operators of
digital television , non-compliance with requirements
of the standard in full.
17
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Search Channel and press OK to open
a text field.You can use the remote control keyboard
(if available) or the onscreen keyboard to enter text.
5 - Enter a number, a name or part of a name and
select Apply and press OK. The TV will search for
matching channel names in the list you selected.
Open a Channel List
Next to the list with all channels for each tuner,
Antenna/Cable or Satellite tuner, you can select a
filtered list or you can select one of the favourite lists
you created.
To open the current channel list…
1 - Press , to switch to TV.
2 - Press LIST* or OK to open the current
channel list.
3 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
Search results are listed as a channel list - see the list
name at the top. The search results disappear once
you select another channel list or close the list with
search results.
To select one of the channel lists…
1 - With a channel list open on screen.
2 - Select the list name at the top of the channel list
and press OK to open the list menu.
3 - In the list menu, select one of the available
channel lists and press OK.
Watching channels
Tune to a Channel
Tip
To start watching TV channels, press . The TV
tunes to the channel you last watched.
You can easily switch between the two tuners in
the Sources menu.
Press SOURCES and select Watch TV to switch
to the Antenna/Cable tuner. Select Watch
Satellite to switch to the satellite tuner.
The TV will always open the last selected channel list
for the selected tuner.
* If
Switch Channels
To switch channels, press or .
If you know the channel number, type in the number
with the number keys. Press OK after you entered
the number to switch immediately.
LIST key is available on your remote control
If the information is available from the Internet, the TV
shows the current programme name and details
followed by the next programme name and details.
Filter a Channel List
Previous channel
You can filter a list with all channels. You can set the
channel list to show only TV channels or only Radio
stations. For Antenna/Cable channels you can set the
list to show the Free-to-Air or the Scrambled
channels. When you have several satellites installed,
you can filter the satellite channel list per satellite.
To switch back to the previously tuned channel,
press BACK.
To set a filter on a list with all channels…
Lock a Channel
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - With a channel list open on screen, select the list
name at the top of the channel list and press OK to
open the list menu.
4 - In the list menu, select the list you want to filter.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press to close the menu.
Lock and Unlock a Channel
You can also tune to channels from a Channel List.
To prevent children from watching a channel, you can
lock a channel. To watch a locked channel, you must
enter the 4 digit Child Lock PIN code first. You
cannot lock programmes from connected devices.
To lock a channel…
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Lock/UnLock and press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it.
6 - Select the channel you want to lock and
press OK. A locked channel is marked with
a (lock).
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Search for a Channel
You can search for a channel to find it in a long list of
channels.
The TV can search for a channel within one of the 3
main channel lists - the Antenna, Cable or Satellite
channel list.
To search for a channel…
18
To unlock a channel…
Rename Channel
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Lock/UnLock and press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
While watching a channel, you can rename channel.
To rename a channel…
1 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Preferences > Rename Channel.
3 - Use the on-screen keyboard to delete the current
name and enter a new name.
If you lock or unlock channels in a channel list, you
only have to enter the PIN code just once until you
close the channel list.
Common Interface
If you installed a CAM in one of the Common
Interface slots, you can view the CAM and operator
information or do some CAM related settings.
Parental Rating
To view the CAM information…
To prevent children from watching a programme not
suitable for their age, you can set an age rating.
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM
for, Watch TV or Watch Satellite.
3 - Press OPTIONS and
select Preferences > Common Interface.
4 - Select the appropriate Common Interface slot
and press (right).
5 - Select the TV operator of the CAM and press OK.
The following screens come from the TV operator.
Digital channels can have their programmes age
rated. When the age rating of a programme is equal to
or higher than the age you have set as age rating for
your child, the programme will be locked. To watch a
locked programme, you must enter the Parental
Rating code first.
To set an age rating…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock > Parental Rating.
3 - Enter a 4-digit Child lock code. If you did not set
a code yet, select Set Code in Child Lock. Enter a
4-digit Child lock code and confirm. Now you can set
an age rating.
4 - Back in Parental Rating, select the age.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
HbbTV on this Channel
If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a
specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for
this channel only.
1 - Tune to the channel of which you want to block
the HbbTV pages.
2 - Press OPTIONS,
select Preferences > HbbTV on this Channel and
press (right).
3 - Select Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
To switch off the parental age rating, select None.
However, in some countries you must set an age
rating.
For some broadcasters/operators, the TV only locks
programmes with a higher rating. The parental age
rating is set for all channels.
To block HbbTV on TV completely…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > Advanced > HbbTV.
3 - Select Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Channel Options
Open Options
While watching a channel, you can set some options.
Depending on the type of channel you are watching
or depending on the TV settings you made, some
options are available.
Channel Info
You can view the technical characteristics of a
particular channel, like digital or sound type, etc.
To open the options menu…
1 - While watching a channel,
press OPTIONS > Preferences.
2 - Press OPTIONS again to close.
To view the technical information on a channel…
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Preferences and
press OK.
19
5 - Select Preferences > Map Channel.
6 - Select one item in the list and press OK.
7 - Select Map Channel.
8 - Once completed, you will see the mapped
channel information in the programme.
3 - Select Channel Info and press OK.
4 - To close this screen, press OK.
Programme Info
View programme details
To call up the details of the selected programme…
Change Logo
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Preferences and
press OK.
3 - Select Programme Info and press OK, you can
see progrmme information.
4 - Press BACK to close.
If there is no programme information in the beginning,
you can get more programme information using
below steps.
1 - Press TV GUIDE, and use navigation keys to
select at the middle and press OK.
2 - Select TV Guide > From the Broadcaster and
press OK.
3 - Select one of channels in TV guide, then
press OK to watch the selected channel.
4 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS.
5 - Select Preferences > Change Logo.
6 - Select one item in the list and press OK.
7 - Select Change Logo.
8 - Once completed, you will see the mapped
channel information in the programme.
Mono / Stereo
You can switch the sound of an analogue channel to
Mono or Stereo.
To switch to Mono or Stereo…
1 - Tune to an analoge channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, and
select Preferences > Mono/Stereo and
press (right).
3 - Select Mono or Stereo and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Favourite Channels
About Favourite Channels
In a favourite channel list, you can collect the
channels you like.
Video Selection
You can create 8 lists of favourite channels for easy
channel zapping. You can name each Favourites List
individually. Only in a Favourites List you can reorder
channels.
Digital TV channels can offer multi video signals (multifeed broadcast), different camera viewpoints or
angles of the same event or different programmes on
one TV channel. The TV shows a message if any such
TV channels are available.
With a Favourites List selected, press the
arrows (up) or (down) to select a channel,
then press OK to watch the selected channel. You
only tune to the channels in that list when
using or keys.
Dual I-II
If an audio signal contains two audio languages but
one language or both has no language indication, this
option is available.
Create a Favourites List
To create a favourite channels list from channel list...
1 - Press , to switch to TV.
2 - Press LIST (if available) or OK to open the
current channel list.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Create Favourites list and press OK.
5 - In the list at the left, select a channel you want as
a favourite and press OPTIONS. Channels come in
the list at the right in the order you add them. To
undo, select the channel in the list at the left and
press OPTIONS again. You can also select a
range of channels by pressing (down) to select
the last channel of the range you want to add and
Map Channel
If there is no programme information in the beginning,
you can do map channel to get more programme
information.
1 - Press TV GUIDE, and use navigation keys to
select at the middle and press OK.
2 - Select TV Guide > From the Internet and
press OK.
3 - Select one of channels in TV guide, then
press OK to watch the selected channel.
4 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS.
20
then press OK.
6 - To finish adding channels, press BACK.
7 - The TV will ask to rename the Favourites List.
You can use the on-screen keyboard
or press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard,
then use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control (if available) to enter new name.
Rename a Favourites List
You can only rename a Favourites List.
To rename a Favourites List…
1 - Press SOURCE.
2 - Select Favourites.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Rename Favourite List and press OK.
5 - Use the on-screen keyboard
or press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard,
then use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control (if available) to enter new name.
6 - When done, turn the remote control,
select Close and press OK.
7 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
If the channel list is long, alternatively, you can select
any channel, then press OPTIONS to open option
menu, then select Create Favourites
list and press OK.
To create a new favourite channels list by copying
existing favourite channel list...
1 - Press , to switch to TV.
2 - Press LIST (if available) or OK to open the
current channel list.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Duplicate Favourites list and press OK.
5 - In the list at the left, select a channel you want as
a favourite and press OPTIONS. Channels come in
the list at the right in the order you add them. To
undo, select the channel in the list at the left and
press OPTIONS again. You can also select a
range of channels by pressing (down) to select
the last channel of the range you want to add and
then press OK.
6 - To finish adding channels, press BACK.
7 - The TV will ask to rename the Favourites List.
You can use the on-screen keyboard
or press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard,
then use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control (if available) to enter new name.
Remove a Favourites List
You can only remove a Favourites List.
To remove a Favourites List…
1234-
Press SOURCE.
Select Favourites.
Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
Select Remove Favourite List and press OK.
Reorder Channels
Only in a Favourites List you can change the
sequence of channels (reorder).
To change the sequence of channels…
1 - Press SOURCES, and select Favourites.
2 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder.
3 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
4 - Select Reorder Channels and press OK.
5 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you
want to reorder and press OK. (The channel will be
marked with grey box)
6 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the
channel where you want it.
7 - Press OK to confirm the new location.
8 - You can reorder channels with the same method
until you close the Favourites List with
the BACK key.
You can add a range of channels in one go or start
a Favourites List by duplicating the channel list with
all channels and removing the channels you do not
want.
Add a Range of Channels
To add a consecutive range of channels to
a Favourites List in one go, you can use Select
Range.
To add a range of channels…
1 - Press SOURCE.
2 - Select Favourites.
3 - Open the Favourites List where you want to
add a range of channels.
4 - Select at the upper right corner and press OK.
5 - Select Edit Favourites List and press OK.
6 - In the list at the left select the first channel of the
range you want to add and press OK.
7 - Press (down) to select the last channel of the
range you want to add and then press OK.
8 - Select Add and press OK. The channels are
marked at the left.
Text / Teletext
Text Pages
To open Text/Teletext press TEXT, while you are
watching TV channels.
To close Text, press TEXT again.
Select a Text page
To select a page . . .
21
1 - Enter the page number with the number keys.
2 - Use the arrow keys to navigate.
3 - Press a colour key to select a colour-coded
subject at the bottom of the screen.
Text Options
In Text/Teletext, press OPTIONS to select the
following…
Text sub-pages
• Freeze page
To stop the automatic rotation of subpages.
• Dual screen / Full screen
To show the TV channel and Text alongside each
other.
• T.O.P. overview
To open T.O.P. Text.
• Enlarge
To enlarge the Text page for comfortable reading.
• Reveal
To unhide hidden information on a page.
• Cycle subpages
To cycle subpages when these are available.
• Hide/Show Favourite Pages
To hide or show the list of favourite pages.
• Clear Favourite Pages
To clear the list of favourite pages.
• Language
To switch the group of characters that Text uses to
display correctly.
• Text 2.5
To activate the Text 2.5 for more colours and better
graphics.
A Text page number can hold several subpages. The
subpage numbers are shown on a bar next to the
main page number.
To select a subpage, press or .
T.O.P. Text pages
Some broadcasters offer T.O.P. Text.
To open T.O.P. Text pages within Text,
press OPTIONS and select T.O.P. Overview.
Favourite pages
The TV makes a list of the last 10 Text pages you
opened. You can easily reopen them again in the
Favourite Text pages column.
1 - In Text, select (heart) in the top left corner of
the screen to show the column of favourite pages.
2 - Press (down) or (up) to select a page
number and press OK to open the page.
You can clear the list with the option Clear Favourite
Pages.
Search Text
You can select a word and scan Text for all
occurences of this word.
Text Setup
1 - Open a Text page and press OK.
2 - Select a word or number with the arrow keys.
3 - Press OK again to jump immediately to the next
occurence of this word or number.
4 - Press OK again to jump to the subsequent
occurence.
5 - To stop searching, press (up) until nothing is
selected.
Text language
Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text
languages available.
To set your primary and secondary Text language . . .
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Language > Primary Text or Secondary
Text.
4 - Select your preferred Text languages.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Text from a connected device
Some devices that receive TV channels can also offer
Text.
To open Text from a connected device . . .
1 - Press SOURCES, select the device and
press OK.
2 - While watching a channel on the device,
press OPTIONS, select Show Device Keys and
select the key and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the device keys.
4 - To close Text, press BACK again.
Text 2.5
If available, Text 2.5 offers more colours and better
graphics. Text 2.5 is activated as a standard factory
setting.
To switch off Text 2.5…
1 - Press TEXT.
2 - With Text/Teletext open on screen,
press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Text 2.5 > Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Digital Text (UK only)
Some digital broadcasters offer dedicated Digital Text
or interactive TV on their digital TV channels. This
includes normal Text using the number, colour and
arrow keys to select and navigate.
To close Digital Text, press BACK.
22
6
HDMI Quality
Connect Devices
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound
quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio
signals. Use an HDMI cable for TV signal.
6.1
About Connections
For best signal quality transfer, use a High speed
HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable longer
than 5 m.
Connectivity Guide
Always connect a device to the TV with the highest
quality connection available. Also, use good quality
cables to ensure a good transfer of picture and
sound.
When you connect a device, the TV recognizes its
type and gives each device a correct type name. You
can change the type name if you wish. If a correct
type name for a device is set, the TV automatically
switches to the ideal TV settings when you switch to
this device in the Sources menu.
Copy protection
HDMI cables support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection signal
that prevents copying content from a DVD disc or Bluray Disc. Also referred to as DRM (Digital Rights
Management).
If you need help to connect several devices to the TV,
you can visit the Philips TV connectivity guide. The
guide offers information on how to connect and
which cables to use.
Go to www.connectivityguide.philips.com
HDMI ARC
Antenna Port
All of the HDMI connections on the TV have HDMI
ARC (Audio Return Channel).
If you have a Set-top box (a digital receiver) or
Recorder, connect the antenna cables to run the
antenna signal through the Set-top box and/or
Recorder first before it enters the TV. In this way, the
antenna and the Set-top box can send possible
additional channels to the Recorder to record.
If the device, typically a Home Theatre System (HTS),
also has the HDMI ARC connection, connect it to any
of the HDMI connections on this TV. With the HDMI
ARC connection, you do not need to connect the
extra audio cable that sends the sound of the TV
picture to the HTS. The HDMI ARC connection
combines both signals.
You can use any HDMI connection on this TV to
connect the HTS but ARC is only available for 1
device/connection at a time.
HDMI MHL
With HDMI MHL, you can send what you see on your
Android smartphone or tablet to a TV screen.
6.2
The HDMI 4 connection on this TV
incorporates MHL 2.0 (Mobile High-Definition Link).
HDMI Ports
This wired connection offers great stability and
bandwidth, low latency, no wireless interference and
good quality sound reproduction. On top of that, the
MHL connection will charge the battery of your
smartphone or tablet. Although connected, your
mobile device will not be charging when the TV is on
standby.
Inform yourself about what passive MHL cable is
23
suited for your mobile device. In particular, with the
HDMI connector for the TV on one side, the type of
connector you need to connect to your smartphone
or tablet.
their respective owners.
DVI to HDMI
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
If you still own a device that only has a DVI
connection, you can connect the device to any of
the HDMI connection with a DVI to HDMI adapter.
Use a DVI to HDMI adapter if your device only has a
DVI connection. Use one of the HDMI connections
and add an Audio L/R cable (mini-jack 3.5mm)
to Audio IN for sound, on the back of the TV.
HDMI CEC - EasyLink
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound
quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio
signals. Use an HDMI cable for High Definition (HD)
TV signals. For best signal quality transfer, use a High
speed HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable
longer than 5 m.
Copy Protection
DVI and HDMI cables support HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection
signal that prevents copying content from a DVD disc
or Blu-ray Disc. Also referred to as DRM (Digital
Rights Management).
EasyLink HDMI CEC
If your devices are connected with HDMI and have
EasyLink, you can operate them with the TV remote
control. EasyLink HDMI CEC must be switched On on
the TV and the connected device.
6.3
Y Pb Pr - Component
Y Pb Pr - Component Video is a high quality
connection.
With EasyLink you can operate a connected device
with the TV remote control. EasyLink uses HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) to communicate with
the connected devices. Devices must support HDMI
CEC and must be connected with an HDMI
connection.
The YPbPr connection can be used for High Definition
(HD) TV signals. Next to the Y, Pb and Pr signals add
the Audio Left and Right signals for sound.
Match the YPbPr (green, blue, red) connector colours
with the cable plugs when you connect.
Use an Audio L/R cinch cable if your device also has
sound.
EasyLink setup
The TV comes with EasyLink switched on. Make sure
that all HDMI CEC settings are properly set up on the
connected EasyLink devices. EasyLink might not work
with devices from other brands.
HDMI CEC on other brands
The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on
different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos
Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and
Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with
EasyLink.
Example HDMI CEC branding names are property of
24
6.4
CI+
Scart
This TV is ready for the CI+ Conditional Access .
SCART is a good quality connection.
With CI+ you can watch premium HD programmes,
like movies and sports, offered by digital TV operators
in your region. These programmes are scrambled by
the TV operator and descrambled with a prepaid CI+
module.
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes. These programmes have
a high level of copy protection.
The SCART connection can be used for CVBS and
RGB video signals but cannot be used for High
Definition (HD) TV signals. The SCART connection
combines video and audio signals. The SCART
connection also supports NTSC playback.
Contact a digital TV operator for more information on
terms & conditions.
6.5
Audio Out - Optical
Audio Out - Optical is a high quality sound
connection.
Smart Card
This optical connection can carry 5.1 audio channels.
If your device, typically a Home Theatre System
(HTS), has no HDMI ARC connection, you can use this
connection with the Audio In - Optical connection on
the HTS. The Audio Out - Optical connection sends
the sound from the TV to the HTS.
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes.
Insert the smart card into the CAM module. See the
instruction you received from the operator.
To insert the CAM in the TV…
1 - Look on the CAM for the correct method of
insertion. Incorrect insertion can damage the CAM
and TV.
2 - While looking at the back of the TV, with the front
of the CAM facing towards you, gently insert the CAM
into the slot COMMON INTERFACE.
3 - Push the CAM in as far as it will go. Leave it in the
slot permanently.
6.6
CAM with Smart Card - CI+
About CI+
When you switch on the TV, it may take a few minutes
before the CAM is activated. If a CAM is inserted and
subscription fees are paid (subscription methods can
differ), you can watch the scrambled channels
supported by the CAM smart card.
Note: Not support for countries in Asia Pacific,
Middle East, and Africa.
The CAM and smart card are exclusively for your TV. If
you remove the CAM, you will no longer be able to
watch the scrambled channels supported by the
CAM.
25
Passwords and PIN codes
Connect with HDMI
For some CAMs, you must enter a PIN code to watch
its channels. When you set the PIN code for the CAM,
we recommend you to use the same code you are
using to unlock the TV.
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
If the Home Theatre System has no HDMI ARC
connection, add an optical audio cable (Toslink) to
send the sound of the TV picture to the Home Theatre
System.
To set the PIN code for the CAM…
1 - Press SOURCES .
2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM
for Watch TV.
3 - Press OPTIONS and select Common
Interface.
4 - Select the TV operator of the CAM. The following
screens come from the TV operator. Follow the onscreen instruction to look up the PIN code setting.
6.7
Home Theatre System - HTS
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
Connect with HDMI ARC
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
Problems with HTS sound
HDMI ARC
If your Home Theatre System has an HDMI ARC
connection, you can use any HDMI connection on the
TV to connect. With HDMI ARC, you do not need to
connect the extra audio cable. The HDMI ARC
connection combines both signals.
All HDMI connections on the TV can offer the Audio
Return Channel (ARC) signal. But once you have
connected the Home Theatre System, the TV can
only send the ARC signal to this HDMI connection.
Sound with loud noise
If you watch a video from a plugged in USB flash drive
or connected computer, the sound from your Home
Theatre System might be distorted. This noise is heard
when the audio or video file has DTS sound but the
Home Theatre System has no DTS sound processing.
You can fix this by setting the Audio Out Format of
the TV to Stereo (uncompressed).
Press for All
Settings > Sound >
Format.
Advanced >
Audio Out
No sound
If you cannot hear the sound from the TV on your
Home Theatre System, check if you connected the
HDMI cable to an HDMI ARC connection on the
Home Theatre System. All HDMI connections on the
TV are HDMI ARC connections.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
6.8
Smartphones and Tablets
To connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV, you can
use a wireless or wired connection.
Wireless
For a wireless connection, on your smartphone or
tablet download the Philips TV Remote App from
26
your favourite app store.
6.11
Wired
Bluetooth - Speakers and
Gamepads
For a wired connection, use the HDMI 4 MHL
connection on the back of the TV. For more
information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up HDMI MHL for more information.
What You Need
You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to
this TV – a wireless speaker, a subwoofer, a sound
bar or headphones. You can also connect a wireless
gamepad with Bluetooth LE.
6.9
Blu-ray Disc Player
To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must
pair the wireless speaker with the TV. You can pair
some wireless speakers and a maximum of 4
Bluetooth LE (low energy) devices. The TV can only
play the sound on one speaker at a time. If you
connect a subwoofer, the sound is played on the TV
and the subwoofer. If you connect a sound bar the
sound is played on the sound bar only.
Use a High speed HDMI cable to connect the Bluray Disc player to the TV.
Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation
Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so
called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio
lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip
sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth
speaker system, inform yourself about the newest
models and look for a device with a low latency
rating. Ask your dealer for advice.
If the Blu-ray Disc player has EasyLink HDMI CEC,
you can operate the player with the TV remote
control.
6.10
DVD Player
Pairing a Device
Use an HDMI cable to connect the DVD player to the
TV.
Alternatively, you can use a SCART cable, if the
device has no HDMI connection.
Position the wireless speaker within a distance of 5
meters from the TV. Read the user manual of the
device for specific information on pairing and on
wireless range. Make sure the Bluetooth setting on TV
is switched on.
Once a wireless gamepad is paired, you can use it.
When a wireless speaker is paired, you can select it to
play the TV sound. When a device is paired, you do
not need to pair it again unless you remove the
device.
To pair a wireless speaker with the TV…
1 - Switch on the wireless speaker and place it within
range of the TV.
2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
4 - Select Bluetooth > Search Bluetooth Device.
5 - Select Start and press OK. Follow the
instuctions on screen. You will pair the device with the
TV and the TV will store the connection. You might
need to unpair a paired device first if the maximum
number of paired devices was reached.
6 - Select the type of device (headphone,
subwoofer, …).
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
If the DVD player is connected with HDMI and has
EasyLink CEC, you can operate the player with the TV
remote control.
27
2 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
the menu.
Select a Device
Once a wireless Bluetooth speaker is paired, you can
select it to play the TV sound.
To select a speaker to play the TV sound…
1 - Press , select Speakers and press OK.
2 - Select the loudspeaker system you want.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
6.13
Remove a Device
Game Console
You can connect or disconnect a wireless Bluetooth
device. When a Bluetooth device is connected, you
can use the gamepad or hear the TV sound through
the wireless speaker. You can also remove a wireless
Bluetooth device. If you remove a Bluetooth device,
the device will be unpaired.
HDMI
For best quality, connect the game console with a
High speed HDMI cable to the TV.
To remove or disconnect a wireless device…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks.
3 - Select Bluetooth > Remove Device.
4 - In the list, select the wireless device.
5 - Select Disconnect or Remove.
6 - Select OK.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Bluetooth On or Off
Y Pb Pr
To connect wireless Bluetooth devices, make sure
Bluetooth is switched on.
Connect the game console with a component video
cable (Y Pb Pr) and an audio L/R cable to the TV.
To switch Bluetooth on…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks.
3 - Select Bluetooth > Bluetooth On/Off.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
6.12
Headphones
You can connect a set of headphones to
the connection on the back of the TV. The
connection is a mini-jack 3.5mm. You can adjust the
volume of the headphones separately.
To adjust the volume…
1 - Press , select Headphone Volume.
28
Scart
Problems
Connect the game console to the TV with a
composite cable (CVBS) and an audio L/R cable to
the TV.
To solve possible interference with other wireless
devices on TV…
• Use a USB extension cord and move the nano
receiver about 1 meter away from the TV.
• Alternatively, you can use a powered USB hub
connected to the TV and plug in the nano receivers in
the USB hub.
If your game console only has Video (CVBS) and
Audio L/R output, use a Video Audio L/R to SCART
adapter (sold separately) to connect to the SCART
connection.
6.15
USB Hard Drive
What You Need
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can pause or
record digital TV broadcasts (DVB broadcasts or
similar).
Minimum Disk Space
• To Pause
To pause a broadcast, you need a USB 2.0
compatible Hard Drive with a minimum of 4GB disk
space.
• To Record
To pause and record a broadcast, you need a
minimum of 250GB disk space.
Best Setting
Before you start playing a game from a connected
game console, we advice you to set the TV in the
ideal setting Game.
To set the TV to the ideal setting…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Picture Style > Game.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Installation
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, you
must connect and format a USB Hard Drive.
Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard Drive.
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of
the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect
another USB device to the other USB ports when
formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - When the TV is tuned to a digital TV channel,
press (Pause). Trying to pause will start the
formatting.
6.14
Gamepad
Connect a Gamepad
To play games from the Internet on this TV, you can
connect a selected range of wireless Gamepads. You
can use Gamepads with a USB nano receiver or
gamepads with Bluetooth.
Follow the instructions on screen.
When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
To connect a Gamepad with a USB nano receiver…
1 - Plug in the small nano receiver in one of the USB
connections on the side of the TV. The wireless nano
receiver comes with the Gamepad.
2 - If the Gamepad is switched on, you can use the
Gamepad.
You can connect a second Gamepad in the second
USB connection on the side of the TV.
Warning
29
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
6.16
USB Keyboard
Connect
Connect a USB keyboard (USB-HID type) to enter text
on your TV.
Use one of the USB connections to connect.
Formatting
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store
apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard
Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard
Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide
data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet
connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive.
Warning
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
Configure
Install the keyboard
To install the USB keyboard, switch on the TV and
connect the USB keyboard to one of
the USB connections on the TV. When the TV
detects the keyboard for the first time, you can select
your keyboard lay-out and test your selection. If you
select a Cyrillic or Greek keyboard layout first, you
can select a secondary Latin keyboard layout.
To format a USB Hard Drive…
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of
the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect
another USB device to the other USB ports when
formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - When the TV is tuned to a digital TV channel,
press (Pause). Trying to pause will start the
formatting. Follow the instructions on screen.
4 - The TV will ask if you want to use the USB Hard
Drive to store apps, agree to the question if you do.
5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
To change the keyboard layout setting when a layout
was selected…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select USB Keyboard Settings to start the
keyboard setup.
Special Keys
Keys for entering text
• Enter key = OK
• Backspace = delete character before cursor
• Arrow keys = navigate within a text field
• To switch between keyboard layouts, if a secondary
layout is set, press the Ctrl + Spacebar keys
simultaneously.
Keys for apps and Internet pages
• Tab and Shift + Tab = Next and Previous
• Home = scroll to the top of the page
• End = scroll to the bottom of the page
• Page Up = jump one page up
• Page Down = jump one page down
• + = zoom in one step
• - = zoom out one step
• * = fit the web page to the screen width
30
6.17
HDMI
USB Flash Drive
For best quality, use an HDMI cable to connect the
camcorder to the TV.
You can view photos or play your music and videos
from a connected USB flash drive.
Insert a USB flash drive in one of
the USB connections on the TV while the TV is
switched on.
The TV detects the flash drive and opens a list
showing its content.
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES and select USB.
Audio Video LR / Scart
You can use an HDMI, YPbPr or SCART connection to
connect your camcorder. If your camcorder only has
Video (CVBS) and Audio L/R output, use a Video
Audio L/R to SCART adapter (sold separately) to
connect to the SCART connection.
To stop watching the USB flash drive content,
press EXIT or select another activity.
To disconnect the USB flash drive, you can pull out
the flash drive anytime.
For more information on watching or playing content
from a USB flash drive, in Help,
select Keywords and look up Photos, Videos and
Music.
6.18
Photo Camera
To view photos stored on your digital photo camera,
you can connect the camera directly to the TV.
Use one of the USB connections on the TV to
connect. Switch on the camera after you made the
connection.
6.20
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES , and select USB.
Your camera might need to be set to transfer its
content with PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol). Read
the user manual of the digital photo camera.
Connect
Computer
You can connect your computer to the TV and use
the TV as a PC monitor.
For more information on viewing photos, in Help,
select Keywords and look up Photos, Videos and
Music.
With HDMI
Use an HDMI cable to connect the computer to the
TV.
6.19
Camcorder
31
With DVI to HDMI
Alternatively, you can use a DVI to HDMI adapter
(sold separately) to connect the PC to HDMI and an
audio L/R cable (mini-jack 3.5mm) to AUDIO IN L/R
on the back of the TV.
Ideal Setting
If you connect a computer, we advice you to give the
connection, on which the computer is connected, the
correct device type name in the Source menu. If you
then switch to Computer in the Source menu, the TV
is set to the ideal Computer setting automatically.
To set the TV to the ideal setting…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Computer.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
32
encryption key - WEP, WPA or WPA2. If you entered
the encryption key for this network before, you can
select OK to make the connection immediately.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
7
Connect your
Android TV
Wi-Fi On/Off
Make sure Wi-Fi is switched on before you try to
make the connection…
7.1
Network and Internet
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off.
4 - If it is switched off, select On and press O.
Home Network
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, your TV must be connected to the Internet.
Connect the TV to a home network with a high-speed
Internet connection. You can connect your TV
wirelessly or wired to your network router.
WPS
If your router has WPS, you can directly connect to
the router without scanning for networks. If you have
devices in your wireless network that use the WEP
security encryption system, you cannot use WPS.
Connect to Network
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network.
4 - Select WPS.
5 - Go to the router, press the WPS button and return
to the TV within 2 minutes.
6 - Select Connect to make the connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Wireless Connection
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet wirelessly, you need
a Wi-Fi router with a connection to the Internet.
Use a high-speed (broadband) connection to the
Internet.
WPS with PIN Code
If your router has WPS with a PIN code, you can
directly connect to the router without scanning for
networks. If you have devices in your wireless
network that use the WEP security encryption system,
you cannot use WPS.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network.
4 - Select WPS with PIN code.
5 - Write down the 8-digit PIN code shown on
screen and enter it in the router software on your PC.
Consult the router manual on where to enter the PIN
code in the router software.
6 - Select Connect to make the connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Make the Connection
Wireless
To make a wireless connection…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network.
4 - Select Wireless.
5 - In the list of found networks, select on your
wireless network. If your network is not in the list
because the network name is hidden (you switched
off the SSID broadcast of the router), select Add New
Network to enter the network name yourself.
6 - Depending on the type of router, enter your
33
successful.
Problems
If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on.
Wireless network not found or distorted
• Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi
802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb
the wireless network.
• Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow
access to the TV's wireless connection.
• If the wireless network does not work properly in
your home, try the wired network installation.
**To fulfill EMC regulations, use a shielded FTP Cat.
5E Ethernet cable.
Network Settings
View Network Settings
Internet does not work
• If the connection to the router is OK, check the
router connection to the Internet.
You can view all current network settings here. The IP
and MAC address, signal strength, speed, encryption
method, etc.
The PC and Internet connection are slow
• Look in your wireless router's user manual for
information on indoor range, transfer rate and other
factors of signal quality.
• Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection
for your router.
To view the current network settings…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > View Network Settings.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
DHCP
• If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the
router. DHCP should be switched on.
Network Configuration
Wired Connection
If you are an advanced user and want to install your
network with Static IP addressing, set the TV to Static
IP.
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet, you need a
network router with a connection to the
Internet. Use a high-speed (broadband) connection
to the Internet.
To set the TV to Static IP…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Network
Configuration and press OK.
4 - Select Static IP and press OK to enable Static
IP Configuration.
5 - Select Static IP Configuration and configure the
connection.
6 - You can set the number for IP
Address, Netmask, Gateway, DNS 1, or DNS 2.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Make the Connection
Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN)
To make a wired connection…
You can switch this TV on from your smartphone or
tablet if the TV is in Standby. The setting Switch On
with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) must be switched on.
1 - Connect the router to the TV with a network cable
(Ethernet cable**).
2 - Make sure that the router is switched on.
3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
5 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network.
6 - Select Wired. The TV constantly searches for
the network connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
To switch on WoWLAN…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Switch On with Wi-Fi
(WoWLAN).
4 - Select On.
34
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > TV Network Name.
4 - Enter the name with the on-screen keyboard.
5 - To finish, select .
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Switch on Wi-Fi connection
You can switch on or off Wi-Fi connection on your
TV.
To switch on Wi-Fi…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Clear Internet Memory
With Clear Internet Memory, you can clear all
Internet files and logins stored on your TV, such as
passwords, cookies, and history.
To clear the Internet memory…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Clear Internet Memory.
4 - Select OK to confirm.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Digital Media Renderer - DMR
If your media files do not play on your TV, make sure
that the Digitial Media Renderer is switched on. As a
factory setting, DMR is switched on.
To switch on DMR…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Digital Media Renderer
- DMR.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
File Sharing
The TV can connect to other devices in your wireless
network, like your computer or smartphone. You can
use a computer with Microsoft Windows or Apple OS
X.
On this TV, you can open photos, music and videos
stored on your computer. Use any recent DLNA
certified media server software.
Wi-Fi Smart Screen
To watch digital TV channels on your smartphone or
tablet with the Philips TV Remote App, you must
switch on Wi-Fi Smart Screen. Some scrambled
channels might not be available on your mobile
device.
7.2
To switch on Wi-Fi Smart Screen…
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, you can sign in to Google with your Google
Account.
Google Account
Sign In
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Smart Screen.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
By signing in you'll be able to play your favourite
games across phone, tablet and TV. You'll also get
customised video and music recommendations on
your TV home screen as well as access to YouTube,
Google Play and other apps.
Sign In
TV Network Name
Use your existing Google Account to sign in to
Google on your TV. A Google Account consists of an
email address and a password. If you don't have an
Google Account yet, use your computer or tablet to
create one (accounts.google.com). To play games
with Google Play, you need a Google+ profile. If you
If you have more than one TV in your home network,
you can give the TV a unique name.
To change the TV name…
35
did not sign in during the first TV installation, you can
always sign in later.
3 - Select an app icon and press OK.
4 - Select Install and press OK.
To sign in after you did the TV installation…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Add
account and press OK.
4 - Press OK on SIGN IN.
5 - With the on-screen keyboard, enter your email
address and press OK.
6 - Enter your password and press the same
small OK key to sign in.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Terms of Use
To install and use the Philips App Gallery apps, you
must agree to the Terms of Use. If you did not agree
to these terms during the first TV installation, you can
always agree to them later. The moment you agree to
the Terms of Use, some apps will be available
immediately and you can browse the Philips App
Gallery to install other apps.
To agree on the Terms of Use after you did the TV
installation…
If you want to sign in with another Google Account,
first sign out and sign in with the other account.
1 - Press HOME and select Philips
Collection > App Gallery and press OK to open
the App Gallery.
2 - You can select Terms of Use, then press OK to
read.
3 - Select Accept and press OK. You cannot undo
this approval.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Android Settings
You can set or view several Android specific settings
or information. You can find the list of apps installed
on your TV and the storage space they need. You can
set the language you like to use with Voice
Search. You can configure the onscreen keyboard or
allow apps to use your location. Explore the different
Android settings. You can go
to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more
information on these settings.
Privacy Settings
You can set some privacy settings for the Philips App
Gallery apps.
• You can allow technical statistics to be send to
Philips.
• You can allow personal recommendations.
• You can allow cookies.
• You can switch on the Child Lock for 18+ rated apps.
To open these settings…
1234-
Press , select All Settings and press OK.
Select Android Settings.
Explore the different Android settings.
Press BACK if necessary, to close the menu.
To set the Philips App Gallery privacy settings…
1 - Press HOME and select Philips
Collection > App Gallery and press OK to open
the App Gallery.
2 - You can select Privacy Policy, then press OK.
3 - Select each setting and press OK to allow or
disallow. You can read about each setting in detail.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
7.3
Philips App Gallery
Philips Apps
Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected
by Philips. The Philips App Gallery apps are made
specially for TV. Downloading and installing App
Gallery apps is free of charge.
7.4
Android Settings
The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ
per country or region.
You can set or view several Android specific settings
or information. You can find the list of apps installed
on your TV and the storage space they need. You can
set the language you like to use with Voice
Search. You can configure the onscreen keyboard or
allow apps to use your location. Explore the different
Android settings. You can go
to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more
information on these settings.
Some App Gallery apps are pre-installed on your TV.
To install other apps from the App Gallery, you will be
asked to agree to the Terms of Use. You can set the
Privacy Settings according to your preference.
To install an app from the App Gallery…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Philips
Collection > App Gallery and press
OK.
36
To open these settings…
1234-
Open the Home Menu
Press , select All Settings and press OK.
Select Android Settings.
Explore the different Android settings.
Press BACK if necessary, to close the menu.
To open the Home menu and open an item…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it.
3 - Press BACK to close the Home menu
without starting anything.
7.5
Home Menu
Search and Voice Search
About the Home Menu
You can search for videos, music or anything else on
the Internet with the icon in the Home menu. You
can use the speak out or type what you are looking
for.
To enjoy the benefits of your Android TV, connect the
TV to the Internet.
Like on your Android smartphone or tablet, the Home
menu is the centre of your TV. From the Home menu
you can start any application, switch to a TV channel,
rent a movie, open a website or switch to a
connected device. Depending on your TV setup and
your country the Home menu can contain different
items.
Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. This restricted profile will
only allow the use of apps which you have selected.
You can only switch out of this profile with a PIN
code.
The Home menu is organised in rows…
Recommendations
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
The first row suggests popular videos, music videos or
Internet hits. You can set the Privacy settings in Terms
of Use to allow suggestions based on your personal
viewing habits.
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google signin
Philips Collection
This row contains suggestions from Apps.
Apps
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
The row of Apps contain all Apps that come with the
TV and the Apps you download from the Google Play
store yourself. In this row you will also find the Apps
for TV, like Watch TV, Sources, Media and others.
Apps you started recently will appear in front of the
row.
Games
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
From here, you can start a game on TV. If you
download a game, it will appear in this row.
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
Settings
From here, you can open a selection of settings.
However, to find all settings, press and select
Settings. You can also open Help here.
All
See also www.support.google.com/androidtv
37
8
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Apps
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
8.1
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
About Apps
You can find all installed apps in
the Apps section of the Home menu.
Music
Like apps on your smartphone or tablet, the apps on
your TV offer specific functions for an enriched TV
experience. Apps like YouTube, games, video stores
or weather forecasts (a.o.). You can use the Internet
app to surf the Internet.
With Google Play Music, you can play your favourite
music on TV.
With Google Play Music you can buy new music on
your computer or mobile device. Or, on your TV, you
can sign up for All Access, the Google Play Music
subscription. Alternatively, you can play the music
you already own, stored on your computer.
Apps can come from the Philips App Gallery or
the Google Play™ Store . To get you started, some
practical apps are pre-installed on your TV.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to take a
music subscription
To install apps from the Philips App Gallery or the
Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to the
Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to use
apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with a
Google Account to use the Google Play apps and
Google Play Store.
To start Google Play Music…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Music and press OK.
3 - Select the music you want and press OK.
4 - To stop the Music app, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
8.2
Google Play
Movies and TV
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent or buy
movies and TV shows to watch on TV.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase movies and TV shows
Games
With Google Play Games, you can play games on TV.
Online or offline.
To rent or buy a movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select a movie or TV show and press OK.
4 - Select the purchase you want and press OK. You
will be taken through the purchase procedure.
You can see what your friends are playing currently or
you can join the game and compete. You can track
your achievements or start wherever you left off.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase new games
To watch a rented or bought movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select the movie or TV show from your library in
the app, select the titel and press OK.
4 - You can use
the (stop), (pause), (rewind) or (fast
forward) keys on the remote control.
5 - To stop the Movies & TV app, press BACK
Start the Google Play Games app to select and install
new game apps on your TV. Some games are free of
charge. A message appears if a particular game needs
a gamepad to play the game.
To start or stop a Google Play Game…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
38
Games and press OK.
3 - Select a game to play or select a new game to
install and press OK.
4 - When done, press BACK repeatedly or
press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated
exit/stop button.
Payments
To make a payment on Google Play on TV, you must
add a form of payment - a credit card (outside the
United States) - to your Google Account. When you
purchase a movie or TV show, you will be charged on
this credit card.
The games you install will also appear in the row of
Games in the Home menu
To add a credit card …
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
1 - On your computer, go to accounts.google.com
and sign in with the Google Account you will use with
Google Play on TV.
2 - Go to wallet.google.com to add a card to your
Google Account.
3 - Enter your credit card data and accept the terms
and conditions.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Google Play Store
From the Google Play Store you can download and
install new apps. Some apps are free of charge.
8.3
Start or Stop an App
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase apps
You can start an app from the Home menu.
To start an app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down to Apps and select the app you
want and press OK.
3 - To stop an app, press BACK or press EXIT
or stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
To install a new app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select the app you want to install and press OK.
4 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
8.4
Parental controls
Lock Apps
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
About App Locks
You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock
18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a
restricted profile in the Home menu.
To set the parental control…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select Settings > Parental controls.
4 - Select the level of maturity you want.
5 - On request, enter the PIN code.
6 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
18+
The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try
to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+
rated apps from the Philips App Gallery.
Restricted profile
You can set up a restructed profile for the Home
menu where only the apps you allow are available.
You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on
the restricted profile.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
Google Play Store - Maturity
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
The level of maturity will determine which apps are
available for instalation.
39
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Google Play Store for more information.
7 - Select Allowed apps and press OK.
8 - In the list of available apps, select an app and
press OK to allow or not allow this app.
9 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
Lock 18+ rated apps
Now you can enter the restricted profile.
You can lock 18+ rated apps from the Philips App
Gallery. This setting controls the 18+ setting in the
Philips App Gallery Privacy Settings.
With the PIN code, you can always change the PIN
code or edit the list of allowed or not allowed apps.
To lock 18+ rated apps…
Enter
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock, select App Lock.
3 - Select On.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To enter (switch to) the restricted profile…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and
select Personal > Security & restrictions and
press OK.
4 - Select Enter restricted profile and press OK.
5 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
6 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
Restricted Profile
About Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. The Home menu will
only show the apps you allowed. You need a PIN
code to switch out of the restricted profile.
You can see when a restricted profile is entered if an
icon appears in the Home screen. Scroll down
to Settings and scroll to the far right.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
Exit
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google signin
To exit the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down
to Settings and scroll far right.
2 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK.
3 - Select Exit restricted profile and press OK.
4 - Enter the PIN code. The TV will exit the restricted
profile.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
8.5
Manage Apps
If you stop an app and return to the Home menu, the
app is not really stopped. The app is still running in
the background to be readily available when you start
it again. To run fluently, most apps need to save some
data in the cache memory of the TV. It might be good
to stop an app completely or clear the cache data of
a particular app to optimise the overall performance
of apps and to keep memory usage low on your
Android TV. Also, it is best to uninstall apps that you
are not using anymore.
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
Set Up
To set up the restricted profile…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and
select Personal > Security & restrictions and
press OK.
4 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK.
5 - Select Settings and press OK.
6 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
To open the list of downloaded and system apps…
1234-
40
Press , select All Settings and press OK.
Select Android Settings and press OK.
Select Device > Apps and press OK.
Select an app and press OK. If the app is still
running, you can force it to stop or you can clear the
cache data. You can uninstall apps you downloaded.
5 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
If you are using a USB Hard Drive to store apps, you
can move the app from the USB Hard Drive to the TV
memory or vice versa.
8.6
Storage
You can see how much storage space - the internal
TV memory - you are using for your apps, videos,
music, etc. You can see how much free space you still
have available for installing new apps. Check your
storage if apps start to run slow or in case of app
trouble.
To see how much storage you are using…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Device > Storage & reset and
press OK.
4 - View the storage usage of the TV memory.
5 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
USB Hard Drive
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can use the
drive to extent the TV memory to store more apps.
The TV will try to store new apps on the USB Hard
Drive first. Some apps do not allow to be stored on a
USB Hard Drive.
41
9
Internet
9.1
Start Internet
You can browse the Internet on your TV. You can
view any Internet website but most of them are not
prepared for a TV screen.
• Some plug-ins (e.g. to view pages or videos) are not
available on your TV.
• You cannot send or download files.
• Internet pages are shown one page at a time and
full screen.
To start the Internet browser…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and
select Apps > Internet and press OK.
3 - Enter an Internet address and select ,
press OK.
4 - To close Internet, press HOME or EXIT.
9.2
Options on Internet
Some extras are available for the Internet.
To open the extras…
1 - With the website open, press OPTIONS.
2 - Select one of the items and press OK.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Enter Address
To enter a new Internet address.
Show Favourites
To view the pages you marked as favourites.
Reload Page
To load the Internet page again.
Zoom Page
Use the slider bar to set the zoom percentage.
Security Info
To view the security level of the current page.
Mark as Favourite
To mark the current page as a favourite.
Subtitles
To select subtitles if available.
42
10
TV Menu
10.1
About TV Menu
If the TV cannot be connected with the Internet, you
can use the TV Menu as your Home menu.
In the TV Menu, you will find every TV function.
10.2
Open TV Menu
To open TV Menu and open an item…
1 - Press to open TV Menu.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it.
3 - Press BACK to close TV Menu without
starting anything.
43
11
11.3
Sources
Device Name and Type
When you connect a new device to the TV and the TV
detects the device, you can assign an icon that fits the
device type. If you connect a device with an HDMI
cable and HDMI CEC, the TV detects the device type
automatically and the device gets an appropriate
icon.
11.1
Switch to a device
From the list of Sources, you can switch to any of the
connected devices. You can switch to a tuner to
watch TV, open the content of a connected USB Flash
Drive or see the recordings you made on a connected
USB Hard Drive. You can switch to your connected
devices to watch their programme, a digital receiver or
a Blu-ray Disc player.
The device type determines picture and sound styles,
resolution values, specific settings or the position
within the Sources menu. You don't have to worry
about the ideal settings.
Rename or Change Type
To switch to a connected device…
You can always change the name or change the type
of a connected device. Look for the icon at the
right of the device name in the Sources menu. Some
TV input sources do not allow a name change.
1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu.
2 - Select one of the item in the source list and
press OK. The TV will show the programme or
content of the device.
3 - Press SOURCES again to close the menu.
One Touch Play
To change the device type…
1 - Select the device in the Sources menu.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Press BACK to hide the onscreen keyboard.
4 - Press (down) to find all available device
types. Select the type you want and press OK.
With the TV in standby, you can switch on a disc
player with your TV remote control.
To switch on both disc player and TV from standby
and start playing the disc immediately,
press (play) on the TV remote control. The device
must be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV
and device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
5 - If you want to reset the type of the device to the
original connector type, select Reset and press OK.
6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu.
To change the device name…
11.2
1 - Select the device in the Sources menu.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard.
4 - Use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control to delete the current name and enter a new
one.
5 - If you want to reset the name of the device to the
original connector name, select Reset and
press OK.
6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu.
Options for a TV Input
Some TV input devices offer specific settings.
To set the options for a specific TV input…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the TV input in the list and press OK.
3 - Press OPTIONS. You can set the options for
the selected TV input here.
4 - Press OPTIONS again to close the Options
menu.
11.4
Possible options…
Computer
Controls
With this option you can operate the connected
device with the TV remote control. The device must
be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and
device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
If you connect a computer, we advice you to give the
connection, on which the computer is connected, the
correct device type name in the Source menu. If you
then switch to Computer in the Source menu, the TV
is set to the ideal Computer setting automatically.
Device Info
To set the TV to the ideal setting…
Open this option to view information on the
connected device.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Computer.
44
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
45
12
Restore a Style
Settings
With a Picture Style selected, you can adjust any
picture setting in All Settings > Picture…
12.1
The most frequently used settings are bundled in
the Frequent Settings menu.
The selected style will store the changes you made.
We recommend to adjust the picture settings for the
style Personal only. The Picture Style - Personal can
save its settings for each individual source in Sources
menu.
To open the menu…
To restore the style to its original setting…
1 - Press .
2 - Select the setting you want to adjust and
press OK.
3 - Press BACK, if you do not want to change
anything.
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Picture Style, and select the Picture Style
you want to restore.
3 - Select Restore Style, and press OK. The style is
restored.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Frequent Settings
12.2
Picture
Home or Shop
If the Picture Style is switched back to Vivid every
time you switch on the TV, the TV location is set
to Shop. A setting meant for in-store promotion.
Picture Style
Select a Style
To set the TV for Home use…
For easy picture adjustment, you can select a preset
Picture Style.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Location > Home.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Picture Style, and select one of the styles
in the list.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
The available styles are…
Picture Settings
• Personal - The picture preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Vivid - Ideal for daylight viewing
• Natural - Natural picture settings
• Standard - Most energy conscious setting - Factory
setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
Colour
With Colour, you can adjust the colour saturation of
the picture.
To adjust the colour…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Colour and press (right) .
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
• Photo - Ideal for viewing photos
• Game - Ideal for gaming
Customise a Style
Any picture setting you adjust, like Colour or Contrast,
is stored in the currently selected Picture Style. It
allows you to customise each style.
Only the style Personal can save its settings for
each source in the Sources menu.
Contrast
With Contrast, you can adjust the contrast of the
picture.
To adjust the contrast…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press
46
OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Contrast and press (right).
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Colour Settings
Colour Enhancement
With Colour Enhancement, you can enhance the
colour intensity and the details in bright colours.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Colour
Enhancement.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Sharpness
With Sharpness, you can adjust the level of
sharpness in fine detail of the picture.
To adjust the sharpness…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Sharpness and press (right).
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Colour Temperature
With Colour Temperature, you can set the picture to
a preset colour temperature or select Custom to set
a temperature setting yourself with Custom Colour
Temperature. Colour Temperature and Custom
Colour Temperature are settings intended for expert
users.
Brightness
To select a preset…
With Brightness, you can set the level of brightness
of the picture signal.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Colour
Temperature.
4 - Select Normal, Warm or Cool. Or
select Custom if you want to customise a colour
temperature yourself.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To adjust the sharpness…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Brightness and press (right).
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Custom Colour Temperature
Advanced Picture Settings
With Custom Colour Temperature, you can set a
colour temperature yourself. To set a custom colour
temperature, first select Custom in the Colour
Temperature menu. Custom Colour Temperature is a
setting intended for expert users.
Computer
If you connect a computer, we advice you to give the
connection, on which the computer is connected, the
correct device type name in the Source menu. If you
then switch to Computer in the Source menu, the TV
is set to the ideal Computer setting automatically.
To set a custom colour temperature…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Custom Colour
Temperature.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value. WP is white point and BL is black
level. You can also select one of the presets in this
menu.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To set the TV to the ideal setting…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Computer.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
47
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Gamma.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Contrast Settings
Contrast Modes
With Contrast Mode, you can set the level at which
power consumption can be reduced by dimming the
intensity of the screen. Choose for the best power
consumption or for the picture with the best intensity.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Contrast Mode.
4 - Select Standard, Best Power, Best Picture,
or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Sharpness Settings
Super Resolution
With Super Resolution, you switch on a superior
sharpness in line edges and contours.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > Super
Resolution.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Dynamic Contrast
With Dynamic Contrast, you can set the level at
which the TV automatically enhances the details in
the dark, middle and light areas of the picture.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Dynamic
Contrast.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Noise Reduction
With Noise Reduction, you can filter out and reduce
the level of image noise.
To adjust the noise reduction…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > Noise
Reduction.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Video Contrast
With Video Contrast, you can decrease the range of
the video contrast.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Video Contrast.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
MPEG Artefact Reduction
With MPEG Artefact Reduction, you can smoothen
the digital transitions in the picture. MPEG artefacts
are mostly visible as small blocks or jagged edges in
images.
To reduce the MPEG artefacts…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > MPEG
Artefact Reduction.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Gamma
With Gamma, you can set a non-linear setting for
picture luminance and contrast. Gamma is a setting
intended for expert users.
To adjust the level…
48
incoming picture. This is a 1:1 pixel on pixel format.
Expert mode for HD and PC input.
Picture Format
Basic
Quick Picture Setting
If the picture is not filling the whole screen, if black
bars are showing on the top or bottom or at both
sides, you can adjust the picture to fill the screen
completely.
During the first installation, you did some picture
settings in a few easy steps. You can redo these steps
with Quick Picture Setting. To do these steps, make
sure the TV can tune to a TV channel or can show a
programme from a connected device.
To select one of the basic settings to fill the screen…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press (if
available on your remote control) or press .
2 - Select Picture Format > Fill Screen, Fit to
Screen or Wide Screen.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
• Fill Screen – automatically enlarges the picture to
fill the screen. Picture distortion is minimal, subtitles
remain visible. Not suitable for PC input. Some
extreme picture formats can still show black bars.
• Fit to Screen – automatically zooms in the picture
to fill the screen without distortion. Black bars may be
visible. Not suitable for PC input.
• Wide Screen – automatically zooms in the picture
to wide screen.
To set the picture in a few easy steps…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Quick Picture Setting.
4 - Select Start. Use the navigation keys to select
your choice.
5 - Finally, select Finish.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
12.3
Sound
Advanced
Sound Style
If the two basic settings are inadequate to format the
picture you want, you can use the advanced settings.
With the advanced settings you manually format the
picture on your screen.
Select a Style
For easy sound adjustment, you can select a preset
setting with Sound Style.
You can zoom, stretch and shift the picture until it
shows what you need – e.g. missing subtitles or
scrolling text banners. If you format the picture for a
specific Source – like a connected game console –
you can return to this setting the next time you use
the game console. The TV stores the last setting you
did for each connection.
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Sound Style, and select one of the styles
in the list.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To format the picture manually…
The available styles are…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press (if
available on your remote control) or press .
2 - Select Advanced and press OK.
3 - Use Shift, Zoom, Stretch or Original to adjust
the picture.
4 - Alternatively, select Last Setting and
press OK to switch to the format you stored before.
5 - Or select Undo to return to the setting the
picture had when you opened Picture Format.
• Shift – Select on the arrows to shift the picture. You
can only shift the picture when it is zoomed in.
• Zoom – Select on the arrows to zoom in.
• Stretch – Select on the arrows to stretch the
picture vertically or horizontally.
• Undo – Select to return to the picture format you
started with.
• Original – Shows the original format of the
• Personal - The sound preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Original - Most neutral sound setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
• Music - Ideal for listening to music
• Game - Ideal for gaming
• News - Ideal for speech
Restore a Style
With a Sound Style selected, you can adjust any
sound setting in Setup > Sound…
The selected style will store the changes you made.
We recommend to adjust the sound settings for the
49
style Personal only. The Sound Style - Personal can
save its settings for each individual source in Sources
menu.
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To restore the style to its original setting…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Sound Style , and select the
Sound Style you want to restore.
4 - Select Restore Style. The style is restored.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Subwoofer Volume
If you connect a wireless Bluetooth subwoofer, you
can slightly increase or decrease the volume of the
subwoofer.
To adjust the volume a little…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Subwoofer Volume.
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Sound Settings
Bass
With Bass, you can adjust the level of low tones in
the sound.
Surround Mode
To adjust the level…
With Surround Mode, you can set the sound effect of
the TV speakers.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Bass and press (right).
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To set the surround mode…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Surround Mode.
4 - Select Stereo or Incredible Surround.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Treble
With Treble, you can adjust the level of high tones in
the sound.
TV Placement
To adjust the level…
As part of the first installation, this setting is set to
either On a TV stand or On the Wall. If you have
changed the placement of the TV since then, adjust
this setting accordingly for best sound reproduction.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Treble and press (right).
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select TV Placement.
4 - Select On a TV stand or On the Wall.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Headphone Volume
With Headphones Volume, you can set the volume
of a connected headphone separately.
Advanced Sound Settings
To adjust the volume…
Auto Volume Levelling
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Headphones Volume.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
With Auto Volume Levelling, you can set the TV to
automatically level out sudden volume differences.
Typically at the beginning of adverts or when you are
switching channels.
50
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Levelling.
4 - If the volume difference is large, select More. If
the volume difference is small, select Less.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced and press (right) to enter
the menu.
4 - Select Auto Volume Levelling and
press (right) to enter the menu.
5 - Select On or Off.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Audio Out Levelling affects both the Audio Out Optical and HDMI ARC sound signals.
Audio Out Delay
If you set an Audio sync delay on your Home Theatre
System, to synchronise the sound with the picture,
you must switch off Audio Out Delay on the TV.
Clear Sound
With Clear Sound, you improve the sound for
speech. Ideal for news programmes. You can switch
the speech improvement on or off.
To switch off Audio Out Delay…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Delay.
4 - Select Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Clear Sound.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Audio Out Offset
If you cannot set a delay on the Home Theatre
System, you can set a delay on the TV with Audio
Out Offset.
Audio Out Format
If you have a Home Theatre System (HTS)
with multichannel sound processing capabilities like
Dolby Digital, DTS® or similar, set the Audio Out
Format to Multichannel. With Multichannel, the TV
can send the compressed multichannel sound signal
from a TV channel or connected player to the Home
Theatre System. If you have a Home Theatre System
without multichannel sound processing, select Stereo.
To synchronise the sound on the TV…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Offset.
4 - Use the slider bar to set the sound offset.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To set the Audio Out Format…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Format.
4 - Select Multichannel or Stereo.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Speakers
Select your Speakers
In this menu you can switch the TV speakers on or off.
If you connect a Home Theatre System or a wireless
Bluetooth speaker, you can select which device is
playing the TV sound. All available loudspeaker
systems are shown in this list.
Audio Out Levelling
Use the Audio Out Levelling setting to level the
volume (loudness) of the TV and the Home Theatre
System when you switch over from one to another.
Volume differences can be caused by differences in
sound processing.
If you use an HDMI CEC connection for an audio
device (like a Home Theatre System), you can select
EasyLink Autostart. The TV will switch on the audio
device, send the TV sound to the device and switch
off the TV speakers.
To level the difference in volume…
To set the TV speakers…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press
OK.
51
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced and press (right) to enter
the menu.
4 - Select Speakers and press (right) to enter
the menu.
5 - Select On, Off, or EasyLink Autostart .
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Advanced Ambilight Settings
Wall Colour
With Wall Colour, you can neutralise the influence of
a coloured wall on the Ambilight colours. Select the
colour of the wall behind the TV and the TV will
modify the Ambilight colours to appear as they are
intended.
To select the colour of the wall . . .
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Wall Colour.
4 - In the colour palette, select the colour that
matches the colour of the wall behind the TV.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
12.4
Ambilight Settings
Ambilight Style
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Ambilight Style.
TV Switch Off
Ambilight Settings
With TV Switch Off, you can set Ambilight to switch
off immediately or slowly fade out when you switch
off the TV. The slow fade out gives you some time to
switch on the lights in your living room.
Ambilight Brightness
With Ambilight Brightness, you can set the level of
brightness of the Ambilight.
To select the way how Ambilight switches off…
To adjust the level…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > TV Switch Off.
4 - Select Fade Out to Off or Immediate Switch
Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Brightness.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Ambilight + Hue
Ambilight Saturation
Configure
With Ambilight Saturation, you can set the level of
colour saturation of the Ambilight.
Step 1 - Network
To adjust the level…
In this first step, you will prepare the TV to find
the Philips Hue Bridge. The TV and the Philips Hue
Bridge must use the same network.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Saturation.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Setting up…
1 - Connect the Philips Hue Bridge to the power
outlet.
2 - Connect the Philips Hue Bridge to the same
router you are using for the TV — use an Ethernet
cable to connect.
3 - Switch on the Hue bulbs.
To start the configuration…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press
2 - Select Ambilight > Ambilight+hue.
52
OK.
3 - Select Configure.
4 - Select Start and press OK. The TV will search
for the Philips Hue Bridge. If the TV is not yet
connected to your network, the TV will start the
network setup first. If the Philips Hue Bridge appears
in the list …
1 - Select a bulb to configure and press OK. The
bulb you selected is flashing.
2 - Select Start and press OK.
3 - First indicate where you placed the bulb relative
to the TV. A correct setting of the Angle will send the
correct Ambilight colour to the bulb. Select the slider
bar to adjust the position.
4 - Secondly, indicate the Distance between the
bulb and the TV. The further away from the TV, the
weaker the Ambilight colour. Select the slider bar to
adjust the distance.
5 - Finally, set the Brightness of the bulb. Select
the slider bar to adjust the brightness.
6 - To stop configuring this bulb, select OK and
press OK.
7 - In the Configure Ambilight+hue menu, you can
do the same for each bulb.
8 - When all Ambilight+hue bulbs are configured,
select Finish and press OK.
go to Step 2 - Hue Bridge.
For more info on connecting the TV to your home
network, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Network, wireless.
Step 2 - Hue Bridge
In the next step, you will link up the TV with
the Philips Hue Bridge.
The TV can only be linked up to one Hue Bridge.
To link the Hue Bridge…
1 - With the TV connected to your home network, it
will show the available Hue Bridges. If the TV did not
find your Hue Bridge yet, you can select Scan
again and press OK.
If the TV found the only Hue Bridge you have, select
the Hue Bridge name and press OK.
If you have more than one Hue Bridge available,
select the Hue Bridge you want to use and press OK.
2 - Select Start and press OK.
3 - Now go to the Philips Hue Bridge and press the
link button in the middle of the device. This will link
the Hue Bridge with the TV. Do this within 30
seconds. The TV will confirm if a Hue Bridge is now
linked to the TV.
4 - Select OK and press OK.
Ambilight+hue is ready for use.
With the Philips Hue bridge linked to the TV, go to
page Hue bulbs.
Immersion
Step 3 - Hue Bulbs
To adjust Ambilight+hue immersion...
Switch Off
To switch off Ambilight+hue...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Ambilight+hue.
4 - Select Off or On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
With Immersion, you can adjust how accurate the
Hue bulbs follow the Ambilight.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Ambilight+hue > Immersion.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
In the next step, you will select the Philips Hue
bulbs that have to follow the Ambilight.
You can select a maximum of 9 Philips Hue bulbs for
Ambilight+hue.
To select the bulbs for Ambilight+hue…
1 - In the list, mark the bulbs that have to follow the
Ambilight. To mark a bulb, select the bulb name and
press OK. When you mark a bulb, the bulb will blink
once.
2 - When you’re done, select OK and press OK.
Lounge Light+hue
If you installed Ambilight+hue, you can let the hue
bulbs follow Lounge Light from Ambilight. The Philips
hue lamps will expand the Lounge Light effect across
the room. The hue bulbs are switched on and
automatically set to follow Lounge Light when you
configure Ambilight+hue. If you do not want the hue
bulbs to follow Lounge Light, you can switch the
Step 4 - Configure Bulb
In the following step, you will configure each Philips
Hue bulb.
To configure each Hue bulb…
53
bulbs off.
Screen Off
To switch the hue bulbs off…
If you only listen to music, you can switch off the TV
screen to save energy.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Ambilight+hue > Lounge Light+hue.
4 - Select Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To only switch off the TV screen…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Screen Off. The screen will switch off.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
View Configuration
To switch the screen back on, press any key on the
remote control.
With View Configuration, you can view current setup
of the Ambilight+hue, network, the Bridge and bulbs.
To view Ambilight+hue configuration...
Switch Off Timer
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Ambilight+hue > View Configuration.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
If the TV receives a TV signal but you don't press a
key on the remote control during a 4 hour period, the
TV switches off automatically to save energy. Also, if
the TV does not receive a TV signal nor a remote
control command for 10 minutes, the TV switches off
automatically.
If you use the TV as a monitor or use a digital receiver
to watch TV (a Set-Top Box - STB) and you do not
use the remote control of the TV, you should
deactivate this automatic switch off.
Reset Configuration
To reset Ambilight+hue...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Ambilight+hue > Reset Configuration.
The configuration is reset.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu
To deactivate the Switch Off Timer …
Eco Settings
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Switch Off Timer.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value. The value 0 deactivates the automatic
switch off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Energy Saving
12.6
12.5
Eco settings bundles the settings that help the
environment.
General Settings
Energy Saving
USB Hard Drive
If you select Energy Saving, the TV switches to Picture
Style - Standard automatically, the most ideal energy
conscious setting for the picture.
To set up and format a USB Hard Drive...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select USB Hard Drive.
4 - Select Start, then follow the instructions on
screen.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To set the TV in Energy Saving…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Energy Saving, the Picture Style is set to
Standard automatically.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
For more information on how to install a USB Hard
54
Drive, in Help, select Keywords and look up USB
Hard Drive, installation or Installation, USB Hard
Drive.
enter the menu.
3 - Select Location > Shop.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
If you use the TV at home, set the TV in Home
location.
USB Keyboard Settings
To install the USB keyboard, switch on the TV and
connect the USB keyboard to one of
the USB connections on the TV. When the TV
detects the keyboard for the first time, you can select
your keyboard lay-out and test your selection. If you
select a Cyrillic or Greek keyboard layout first, you
can select a secondary Latin keyboard layout.
Shop Setup
If the TV is set to Shop, you can set the availablility of
a specific demo for in store use.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select USB Keyboard Settings to start the
keyboard setup.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Shop Setup and press (right) to enter
the menu.
4 - Change the settings according to your
preference.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Philips Logo Brightness
EasyLink
You can switch off or adjust the brightness of the
Philips logo on the front of the TV.
EasyLink
To change the keyboard layout setting when a layout
was selected…
To switch off EasyLink completely…
To adjust or switch off…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select EasyLink, press (right) and
select EasyLink one step further.
4 - Select Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Philips Logo Brightness, and
press (right) to enter the menu.
4 - Select Minimum, Medium, Maximum,
or Off to switch off the lighting of the logo.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
EasyLink Remote Control
To switch off EasyLink remote control…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select EasyLink > Easylink Remote Control.
4 - Select Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Home or Shop
If the TV is installed in a shop, you can set the TV to
display an in store promotion banner. Picture
Style is set to Vivid automatically. Switch Off
Timer is switched off.
To set the TV to Shop location…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
55
enter the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > HbbTV.
4 - Select On or Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Advanced Settings
TV Guide
The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. In some regions
and for some channels, TV Guide information might
not be available. The TV can collect TV Guide
information for the channels that are installed on the
TV. The TV cannot collect the TV Guide information
from channels viewed from a digital receiver or
decoder.
If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a
specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for
this channel only.
1 - Tune to the channel of which you want to block
the HbbTV pages.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select
Preferences > HbbTV on this Channel.
3 - Select Off.
The TV comes with the information set to From the
Broadcaster.
If TV Guide information comes from the Internet, the
TV Guide can also list analogue channels next to the
digital channels. The TV Guide menu also shows a
small screen with the current channel.
Factory Settings
You can set the TV back to the original TV settings
(the factory settings).
From the Internet
To switch back to the original settings…
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can set the
TV to receive the TV Guide information from the
Internet.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Factory Settings.
4 - Select OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To set the TV Guide information…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > TV Guide > From the
Internet.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Reinstall TV
You can redo a full TV installation. The TV is
completely reinstalled.
Channel Logos
To redo a full TV installation…
In some countries, the TV can show the channel
logos.
If you do not want these logos to appear, you can
switch them off.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and select Reinstall
TV.
3 - Follow the instructions on screen. The installation
may take a few minutes.
To switch off the logos…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Channel Logos and
press (right) to enter the menu.
4 - Select Off.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
12.7
Clock, Region and Language
Menu Language
To change the language of the TV menus and
messages…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Language > Menu Language.
4 - Select on the language you need and press OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
HbbTV
If a TV channel offers HbbTV pages, you must first
switch on HbbTV in the TV settings to view the pages.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
56
Language preferences
Subtitles from Text
Audio Language Settings
If you tune to an analogue channel, you need to
make the subtitles available for each channel
manually.
Digital TV channels can broadcast audio with several
spoken languages for a programme. You can set a
preferred primary and secondary audio language. If
audio in one of these languages is available, the TV
will switch to this audio.
1 - Switch to a channel and press TEXT to open
Text.
2 - Enter the page number for subtitles, usually 888.
3 - Press TEXT again, to close Text.
If none of the preferred audio languages is available,
you can select another audio language which is
available.
If you select On in the Subtitle menu when watching
this analogue channel, subtitles will be shown if
available.
To set the primary and secondary audio language…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Selec Region and Language nd press (right)
to enter the menu.
3 - Select Languages > Primary
Audio or Secondary Audio.
4 - Select on the language you need.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Text / Teletext Languages
Text Pages
To open Text/Teletext press TEXT, while you are
watching TV channels.
To close Text, press TEXT again.
Select a Text page
To select a page . . .
Subtitles
1 - Enter the page number with the number keys.
2 - Use the arrow keys to navigate.
3 - Press a colour key to select a colour-coded
subject at the bottom of the screen.
Switch On
To switch on Subtitles, press SUBTITLE.
Text sub-pages
You can switch subtitles On, Off or On During
Mute.
Or to show subtitles automatically when the
broadcasted programme is not in language – the
language set for the TV – select Automatic. This
setting will also show Subtitles automatically when
you mute the sound.
A Text page number can hold several subpages. The
subpage numbers are shown on a bar next to the
main page number.
To select a subpage, press or .
T.O.P. Text pages
Some broadcasters offer T.O.P. Text.
To open T.O.P. Text pages within Text,
press OPTIONS and select T.O.P. overview.
Subtitle Language Settings
Favourite pages
Digital channels can offer several subtitle languages
for a programme. You can set a preferred primary and
secondary subtitle language. If subtitles in one of
these languages are available, the TV will show the
subtitles you selected.
The TV makes a list of the last 10 Text pages you
opened. You can easily reopen them again in the
Favourite Text pages column.
1 - In Text, select the star in the top left corner of
the screen to show the column of favourite pages.
2 - Press (down) or (up) to select a page
number and press OK to open the page.
You can clear the list with the option Clear favourite
pages.
If none of the preferred subtitle languages are
available, you can select another subtitle language
which is available.
To set the primary and secondary subtitle language…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Languages > Primary
Subtitles or Secondary Subtitles.
4 - Select on the language you need.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Search Text
You can select a word and scan Text for all
occurences of this word.
1 - Open a Text page and press OK.
2 - Select a word or number with the arrow keys.
3 - Press OK again to jump immediately to the next
occurence of this word or number.
57
4 - Press OK again to jump to the subsequent
occurence.
5 - To stop searching, press (up) until nothing is
selected.
3 - Select Language > Primary Text or Secondary
Text.
4 - Select your preferred Text languages.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Text from a connected device
Text 2.5
Some devices that receive TV channels can also offer
Text.
To open Text from a connected device . . .
If available, Text 2.5 offers more colours and better
graphics. Text 2.5 is activated as a standard factory
setting.
To switch off Text 2.5…
1 - Press , select the device and press OK.
2 - While watching a channel on the device,
press OPTIONS, select Show device keys and
select the key and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the device keys.
4 - To close Text, press BACK again.
Digital Text (UK only)
1 - Press TEXT.
2 - With Text/Teletext open on screen,
press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Text 2.5 > Off.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Some digital broadcasters offer dedicated Digital Text
or interactive TV on their digital TV channels. This
includes normal Text using the number, colour and
arrow keys to select and navigate.
Clock
To close Digital Text, press BACK.
Date and Time
Automatic
Text Options
The standard setting for the TV clock is Automatic.
The time information comes from the broadcasted
UTC - Coordinated Universal Time information.
In Text/Teletext, press OPTIONS to select the
following…
• Freeze page
To stop the automatic rotation of subpages.
• Dual screen / Full screen
To show the TV channel and Text alongside each
other.
• T.O.P. overview
To open T.O.P. Text.
• Enlarge
To enlarge the Text page for comfortable reading.
• Reveal
To unhide hidden information on a page.
• Cycle subpages
To cycle subpages when these are available.
• Language
To switch the group of characters that Text uses to
display correctly.
• Text 2.5
To activate the Text 2.5 for more colours and better
graphics.
If the clock is not correct, you can set the TV clock
to Country Dependent. For some countries, you can
select a specific time zone or set a time offset. In
some countries, for some network operators, the
clock settings are hidden to avoid an incorrect clock
setting.
To set the TV clock…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Clock > Auto Clock Mode.
3 - Select Automatic or Country Dependent.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step.
Manual
If none of the automatic settings display the time
correctly, you can set the time manually.
However, if you schedule recordings from the TV
Guide, we recommend not to change the time and
date manually. In some countries, for some network
operators, the clock settings are hidden to avoid an
incorrect clock setting.
Text Setup
Text language
Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text
languages available.
To set your primary and secondary Text language . . .
1 - Press , select All Settings and press
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
To set the TV clock manually (if available)…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Clock > Auto Clock Mode and press OK.
3 - Select Manual and press OK.
4 - Press (left) and select Date or Time.
OK.
58
5 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step.
the menu.
Hard of Hearing
Time Zone
Some digital TV channels broadcast special audio and
subtitles adapted for the hard of hearing or deaf
people. With Hearing impaired switched on, the TV
automatically switches to the adapted audio and
subtitles, if available. Before you can switch
on Hearing impaired, you have to switch
on Universal Access.
For some countries, you can select specific time
zones to set the TV clock correctly.
To set the time zone (if available)…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Clock > Time Zone.
4 - According to your country, you can select a time
zone or set a time offset to correct the TV clock.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch on Hearing impaired…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Hearing impaired and press (right) to
enter the menu.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Sleep Timer
With the Sleep Timer, you can set the TV to switch to
Standby automatically after a preset time.
To set the Sleep Timer…
Audio Description
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Clock > Sleep Timer.
4 - With the slider bar you can set the time to up to
180 minutes in increments of 5 minutes. If set to 0
minutes, the Sleep Timer is switched off. You can
always switch off your TV earlier or reset the time
during the countdown.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Switch On
Digital TV channels can broadcast special audio
commentary describing what is happening on
screen.
To be able to set the visually impaired audio and
effects, you have to switch on Audio
Description first.
Also, before you can switch on Audio Description,
you have to switch on Universal Access in setup
menu.
With Audio Description, a narrator's commentary is
added to the normal audio.
To switch on the commentary (if available)…
12.8
Universal Access
To switch on Audio Description…
Switch On
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Audio Description and press (right) to
enter the menu.
4 - Select Audio Description one step further.
5 - Select On.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
With Universal Access switched on, the TV is
prepared for use for the deaf, hard of hearing, blind or
partially sighted people.
Switch on
If you did not switch on Universal Access during the
installation, you can still switch it on in Universal
Access menu.
To switch on Accessibility…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Universal Access one step further.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
Mixed Volume
You can mix the volume of the normal audio with the
audio commentary.
To mix the volume…
59
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Audio Description > Mixed Volume.
4 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
App Lock
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up APP lock for more information.
Set Code / Change Code
The Child Lock PIN code is used to lock or unlock
channels or programmes.
Audio Effect
To set the lock code or to change the current code…
Some audio commentary can hold extra audio
effects, like stereo or fading sound.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Set Code or Change Code .
4 - Enter a 4 digit code of your choice. If a code is set
already, enter the current Child Lock code and then
enter the new code twice.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch on Audio effects (if available)…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Audio Description > Audio Effects.
4 - Select On.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
The new code is set.
Forgotten your Child Lock PIN code?
Speech
If you forgot your PIN code, you can override the
current code and enter a new code.
The audio commentary can also hold subtitles for the
words which are spoken.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Change Code.
4 - Enter the overriding code 8888.
5 - Now enter a new Child Lock PIN code and enter it
again to confirm.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch on these subtitles (if available) . . .
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Audio Description > Speech.
4 - Select Descriptive or Subtitles.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
The new code is set.
12.9
Child Lock
Parental Rating
To set a minumum age to watch rated programmes...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Parental Rating, and select one of the
age in the list.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
60
4 - To stop playing videos, photos and music,
press EXIT.
13
Videos, Photos and
Music
13.3
From a Cloud Storage Service
13.1
You can view photos or play music and videos you
uploaded on a storage service in the online cloud*.
From a USB Connection
With the Cloud Explorer app you can connect to
Cloud Hosting Services. You can use your login and
password to connect.
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a connected USB flash drive or USB Hard
Drive.
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Cloud
Explorer and press OK.
3 - Select the hosting service you need.
4 - Connect and sign in to the hosting service with
your login and password.
5 - Select the photo or video you want to play and
press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
With the TV switched on, plug in a USB flash drive or a
USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections. The
TV detects the device and will list your media files.
If the list of files does not appear automatically…
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right)
to browse your files in the folder structure you have
organised on the drive.
3 - To stop playing videos, photos and music,
press EXIT.
* A storage service like Dropbox™.
Warning
13.4
If you try to pause or record a programme with a USB
Hard Drive connected, the TV will ask you to format
the USB Hard Drive. This formatting will delete all
current files on the USB Hard Drive.
Favourites, Most Popular,
Last Played menu
View favourite files
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select
Favourites.
3 - You can view all favourite files in the list.
13.2
From a Computer or NAS
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a computer or a NAS (Network Attached
Storage) in your home network.
View most popular files
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select Most
popular.
3 - Press OK to view files in the list or
press OPTIONS to clear the list of most popular.
The TV and computer or NAS must be in the same
home network. On your computer or NAS, you need
to install Media Server Software. Your Media Server
must be set to share your files with the TV. The TV
shows your files and folders as they are organised by
the Media Server or as they are structured on your
computer or NAS.
View last played files
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select Last
played.
3 - Press OK to view files in the list or
press OPTIONS to clear the list of last played.
The TV does not support subtitles on video streams
from a computer or NAS.
If the Media Server supports searching for files, a
search field is available.
To browse and play the files on your computer…
1 - Press SOURCES, select Network and
press OK.
2 - Select SimplyShare Devices and
press (right) to select the device you need.
3 - You can browse and play your files.
61
13.5
Play your Videos
Control Bar
To show or hide the control bar when a video is
playing, press INFO* or OK.
1 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous photo in a folder
- : Jump to the next photo in a folder
- : Pause the slideshow playback
2 - Mark as favourites
3 - Start a slideshow
4 - Rotate the photo
5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
6 - Repeat: plays all photos in this folder once or
continuously
7 - Stop the music playing in the background
8 - Set the speed of the slide show
1 - Progress bar
2 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous video in a folder
- : Jump to the next video in a folder
- : Rewind
- : Fast forward
- : Pause the playback
* If INFO key is available on your remote control
3 - Mark as favourites
4 - Play all videos
5 - Subtitle: switch subtitles On, Off or On During
Mute.
6 - Subtitle language: select a Subtitle Language
7 - Audio language: select an audio language
8 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
9 - Repeat: plays all videos in this folder once or
continuously
13.7
Play your Music
Control Bar
To show or hide the control bar when a music is
playing, press INFO* or OK.
* If INFO key is available on your remote control
13.6
View your Photos
Control Bar
To show or hide the control bar when a slideshow is
playing, press INFO* or OK.
1 - Progress bar
2 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous music in a folder
- : Jump to the next music in a folder
- : Rewind
- : Fast forward
- : Pause the playback
3 - Mark as favourites
62
4 - Play all music
5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
6 - Repeat: plays all music in this folder once or
continuously
* If INFO key is available on your remote control
63
Internet or vice versa. The TV might have switched
to From the Internet automatically.
To make the recordings available in the list of
recordings, switch to the setting that was selected
when the recordings were made.
14
TV Guide
14.1
What You Need
14.3
With the TV Guide you can view a list of the current
and scheduled TV programmes of your channels.
Depending on where the TV guide information (data)
is coming from, analogue and digital channels or only
digital channels are shown. Not all channels offer TV
Guide information.
Using the TV Guide
Open the TV Guide
To open the TV Guide, press TV GUIDE. The TV
Guide shows the channels of the selected tuner.
The TV can collect TV Guide information for the
channels that are installed on the TV. The TV cannot
collect the TV Guide information for channels viewed
from a digital receiver or decoder.
Press TV GUIDE again to close.
The first time you open the TV Guide, the TV scans all
TV channels for programme information. This may
take several minutes. TV Guide data is stored on TV.
14.2
TV Guide Data
Tune to a Programme
The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. In some regions
and for some channels, TV Guide information might
not be available. The TV can collect TV Guide
information for the channels that are installed on the
TV. The TV cannot collect the TV Guide information
from channels viewed from a digital receiver or
decoder.
From the TV Guide, you can tune to a current
programme.
The TV comes with the information set to From the
Broadcaster.
1 - Press OPTIONS, and select Preferences.
2 - Select Channel Info, and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to close.
To switch to the programme (channel), select the
programme and press OK.
View programme details
To call up the details of the selected programme…
If TV Guide information comes from the Internet, the
TV Guide can also list analogue channels next to the
digital channels. The TV Guide menu also shows a
small screen with the current channel.
Change Day
From the Internet
The TV Guide can show the scheduled programmes
for the upcoming days (maximum up to 8 days).
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can set the
TV to receive the TV Guide information from the
Internet.
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Select Now and press OK.
3 - Select the day you need.
To set the TV Guide information…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > TV Guide > From the
Internet and press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Set a Reminder
You can set a reminder for a programme. A message
will alert you at the start of the programme. You can
tune to this channel immediately.
Missing recordings
In the TV Guide a programme with a reminder is
marked with a (clock).
When some recordings seem to have disappeared
from the list of recordings, the TV Guide info (data)
might have changed. Recordings made with the
setting From the Broadcaster become invisible in
the list if you switch the setting to From the
To set a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select an upcoming
programme.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
64
3 - Select Set Reminder and press OK.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
To clear a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a programme
with the reminder.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Clear Reminder and press OK.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Search by Genre
If the information is available, you can look up
scheduled programmes by genre like movies, sports,
etc.
To search for programmes by genre…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Use navigation keys to select at the middle
and press OK.
3 - Select Search by Genre and press OK.
4 - Select the genre you want and press OK. A list
with the found programmes appears.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Set a Recording
You can set a recording in the TV Guide*.
In the TV Guide, a programme set to be recorded is
marked with .
To record a programme…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a future or
ongoing programme.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Record.
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
* See chapter Recording and Pause TV for more
information.
65
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Use navigation keys to select Now, and
press OK.
3 - Select Now, Later, Tomorrow or the day you
need, and press OK or BACK to close the
menu.
4 - Select the programme you wish to record,
press OPTIONS, select Record, and
press OK. The programme is scheduled for
recording. A warning will show automatically when
overlapping recordings are scheduled. If you plan to
record a programme in your absence, remember to
leave the TV switched to Standby and the USB Hard
Drive switched on.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
15
Recording and
Pause TV
15.1
Recording
What You Need
You can record a digital TV broadcast and watch it
later.
To record a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the on screen TV
Guide
• a reliable TV clock setting. If you reset the TV clock
manually, recordings may fail.
Recording Conflicts
When two scheduled recordings are overlapping in
time, there is a recording conflict. To solve a recording
conflict, you can adjust the start and end time of one
or both scheduled recordings.
You cannot record when you are using Pause TV.
To adjust the start or end time of a scheduled
recording…
In terms enforcement of copyright legislation, some
DVB providers can apply different restriction by
means of DRM (Digital Right Management)
technology. In case of broadcasting protected
channels, recording, record validity or number of
views may be restricted. Recording may be
completely prohibited. In case of trying to record a
protected broadcasting or play back an expired
recording, an error message can appear.
1 - Press SOURCES, and select Recordings.
2 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
3 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders,
select Recordings and press OK to view the
scheduled recordings only.
4 - Select the scheduled recording that conflicts with
another scheduled recording and press OPTIONS.
5 - Select Adjust Time, and press OK.
6 - Select the start or end time and change the time
with the (up) or (down) keys.
Select Apply and press OK.
7 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Record a Programme
Record Now
To record the programme you are watching right now,
press (Record) on the remote control. The
recording will start immediately.
Auto End Margin
To stop the recording, press (Stop).
You can set the time margin that the TV will add
automatically at the end of each scheduled recording.
When TV Guide data is available, the programme you
are watching will be recorded from the moment you
pressed the recording key until the programme
ends. If no TV Guide data is available, the recording
will only last 30 minutes. You can adjust the end time
of the recording in the list of Recordings.
To set the automatic end time margin…
1 - Press SOURCES, and select Recordings.
2 - Use navigation keys to select at the upper right
corner and press OK.
3 - Select Auto End Margin and press OK.
4 - Press (up) or (down) and press OK to
set the time margin added to a recording
automatically. You can add up to 45 minutes to a
recording.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Schedule a Recording
You can schedule a recording of an upcoming
programme for today or a few days from today
(maximum of 8 days away). The TV will use the data
from the TV Guide to start and end the recording.
To record a programme…
66
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up USB Hard Drive, installation or Installation,
USB Hard Drive.
Manual Recording
You can schedule a recording that is not linked to a
TV programme. You set the tuner type, channel and
the start and end time yourself.
To schedule a recording manually…
Pause a Programme
1 - Press SOURCES, and select Recordings.
2 - At the top of the screen, select Scheduled .
3 - Use navigation keys to select at the upper right
corner, and press OK.
4 - Select Schedule and press OK.
5 - Select the tuner from where you want to record
and press OK.
6 - Select the channel to record from and press OK.
7 - Select the day of the recording and press OK.
8 - Set the start and end time of the recording. Select
a button and use the (up) or (down) keys to
set the hours and minutes.
9 - Select Schedule and press OK to schedule the
manual recording.
To pause and resume a broadcast…
• To pause a broadcast, press (Pause). A progress
bar at the bottom of the screen appears briefly.
• To call up the progress bar, press (Pause) again.
• To resume watching, press (Play).
With the progress bar on screen, press (Rewind)
or press (Forward) to select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed.
You can pause a broadcast for a maximum time span
of 90 minutes.
To switch back to the live TV broadcast,
press (Stop).
The recording will appear in the list of scheduled
recordings and reminders.
Replay
Watch a Recording
Since the TV stores the broadcast you are watching,
you can mostly replay the broadcast for a few
seconds.
To watch a recording…
1 - Press SOURCES, and select Recordings.
2 - In the list of recordings, select the recording you
need and press OK to start watching.
3 - You can use the
keys (pause), (play), (rewind), (fast
forward) or (stop).
4 - To switch back to watch TV, press EXIT.
To replay a current broadcast…
1 - Press (Pause)
2 - Press (Rewind). You can
press repeatedly to select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed. At one point you
will reach the start of the broadcast storage or the
maximum time span.
3 - Press (Play) to watch the broadcast again.
4 - Press (Stop) to watch the broadcast live.
15.2
Pause TV
What You Need
You can pause a digital TV broadcast and resume
watching it a bit later.
To pause a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the on screen TV
Guide
With the USB Hard Drive connected and formatted,
the TV continuously stores the TV broadcast you are
watching. When you switch to another channel, the
broadcast of the former channel is cleared. Also
when you switch the TV to standby the broadcast is
cleared.
You cannot use Pause TV when you are recording.
67
16
Cast to Your TV
Smartphones and
Tablets
To cast an app to the TV screen…
Philips TV Remote App
1 - On your smartphone or tablet, open an app that
supports Google Cast.
2 - Tab the Google Cast icon.
3 - Select the TV you would like to cast to.
4 - Press play on your smartphone or tablet. What
you selected should start playing on TV.
The new Philips TV Remote App on your smartphone
or tablet is your new TV buddy.
16.3
16.1
With the TV Remote App, you master your media
around you. Send photos, music or videos to your big
TV screen or watch any of your TV channels live on
your tablet or phone. Look up what you want to
watch on the TV Guide and watch it on your phone or
TV. With the TV Remote App you can use your phone
as a remote control.
AirPlay
To add the AirPlay functionality to your Android TV,
you can download and install one of the several
Android apps that do just that. You can find several of
these apps in the Google Play Store.
Download the Philips TV Remote App from your
favourite app store today.
16.4
MHL
The Philips TV Remote App is available for iOS and
Android and is free of charge.
This TV is MHL™ compliant.
If your mobile device is also MHL compliant, you can
connect your mobile device with a MHL cable to the
TV. With the MHL cable connected you can share
what's on your mobile device on the TV screen. Your
mobile device charges its battery at the same time.
The MHL connection is ideal for watching movies or
playing games from your mobile device on TV for a
longer time.
16.2
Google Cast
What You Need
If an app on your mobile device has Google Cast, you
can cast your app on this TV. On the mobile app, look
for the Google Cast icon. You can use your mobile
device to control what's on TV. Google Cast works on
Android and iOS.
Charging
With the MHL cable connected, your device will
charge while the TV is switched on (not in standby).
Your mobile device must be connected to the same
Wi-Fi home network as your TV.
MHL Cable
You need a passive MHL cable (HDMI to Micro USB)
to connect your mobile device to the TV. You might
need an extra adapter to connect to your mobile
device. To connect the MHL cable to the TV use
the HDMI 4 MHL connection.
Apps with Google Cast
New Google Cast apps come available every
day. You can already try it with YouTube, Chrome,
Netflix, Photowall … or Big Web Quiz for
Chromecast. See also google.com/cast
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
68
17
Games
17.1
What You Need
On this TV, you can play games…
• from the App Gallery in the Home menu
• from the Google Play Store in the Home menu
• from a connected Game Console
Games from the App Gallery or the Google Play Store
must be downloaded and installed on TV before you
can play them. Some games need a gamepad to play.
To install game apps from the Philips App Gallery or
the Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to
the Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to
use apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with
a Google Account to use the Google Play apps and
Google Play Store.
17.2
Play a Game
From the Home menu
To start a game from the Home menu…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down to Games , select a game and
press OK.
3 - Press BACK repeatedly or
press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated
exit/stop button.
From a Game Console
To start a game from a Game Console…
1 - Switch on the Game Console.
2 - Press SOURCES and select a game console
or the name of the connection.
3 - Start the game.
4 - Press BACK repeatedly or
press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated
exit/stop button.
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Game Console, connect.
69
• Rhytm - Based on audio dynamics
• Party - A mix of all Follow Audio styles, one after
the other
18
Ambilight
18.1
Follow Colour
Ambilight Style
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio
dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can
set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can
switch Ambilight off.
Follow Video
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio
dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can
set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can
switch Ambilight off.
If you select Follow Colour, you can select one of the
preset colour styles.
To set the Ambilight Style…
If you select Follow Video, you can select one of the
styles that follow the dynamics of the picture on your
TV screen.
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Colour.
3 - Select the style you want.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
To set the Ambilight Style…
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Video.
3 - Select the style you want.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
The available Follow Colour styles are…
• Hot Lava - Red colour variations
• Deep Water - Blue colour variations
• Fresh Nature - Green colour variations
The available Follow Video styles are…
• Standard - Ideal for day to day TV watching
• Natural - Follows the picture or sound as truthful
as possible
• Immersive - Ideal for action movies
• Vivid - Ideal for daylight conditions
• Warm White - White colour variations
• Cool White - Static colour
Follow App
• Game - Ideal for gaming
• Comfort - Ideal for a quiet evening
• Relax - Ideal for a lounge feeling
This function is available when you control Ambilight
with an app.
To set the Ambilight Style…
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow App.
3 - Follow the on-screen instruction.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Follow Audio
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio
dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can
set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can
switch Ambilight off.
18.2
If you select Follow Audio, you can select one of the
styles that follow the dynamics of the sound.
Ambilight Off
To set the Ambilight Style…
To switch off Ambilight…
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Audio.
3 - Select the style you want.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Off.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
The available Follow Audio styles are…
• Lumina - Mixes audio dynamics with video colours
• Colora - Based on audio dynamics
• Retro - Based on audio dynamics
• Spectrum - Based on audio dynamics
• Scanner - Based on audio dynamics
70
18.3
Ambilight Settings
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Ambilight, Settings for more information.
71
19
Using Now on TV
Top Picks
To open Now on TV…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Now on TV at the top of the screen
and press OK.
3 - Select More to open TV guide.
19.1
About Top Picks
With Top Picks your TV recommends…
• current TV programmes in Now on TV
• the latest rental videos in Video on Demand
• online TV services (Catch Up TV) in TV on
Demand
When you open Now on TV, the TV may need a few
seconds to refresh the page information.
19.3
To enjoy Top Picks, connect your TV to the
Internet. Make sure you agree to the Terms of Use.
The Top Picks information and services are only
available in selected countries.
TV on Demand
About TV on Demand
Terms of Use
With TV on Demand , you can watch TV
programmes you missed or watch your favourite
programmes whenever it suits you best. This service is
also called Catch Up TV, Replay TV or Online TV.
Programmes available on TV on Demand are free to
watch.
To allow the TV to make these recommendations, you
must agree to the Terms of Use. To get personalised
recommendations based on your viewing habits,
make sure you checked the box for Serving your
personalized viewing recommendations .
To open the Terms of Use…
You can let TV on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of programmes, based on the TV
installation and the programmes you watch regularly.
1 - Press TOP PICKS.
2 - Use navigation keys to select at the upper right
corner, select Terms of Use and press OK.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when TV on Demand is available.
19.2
Now on TV
Using TV on Demand
About Now on TV
To open TV on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select TV on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Select All Broadcast and press OK. You can
select a specific broadcaster if more than one is
available.
4 - Press BACK to close.
With Now on TV , the TV recommends the most
popular programmes to watch at this moment.
The recommended programmes are selected from
the channels you installed. The selection is made
from channels of your country. Also, you can let Now
on TV do some personalised recommendations for
you, based on programmes you watch regularly.
When you open TV on Demand, the TV may need a
few seconds to refresh the page information.
To make the Now on TV information available…
• the Now on TV information must be available in your
country.
• the TV must have channels installed.
• the TV must be connected to the Internet.
• the TV Clock must be set to Automatic or Country
Dependent.
• you must accept the Terms of Use (You might have
accepted already when you connected to the
Internet.).
Once a programme started, you can use
the (Play) and (Pause) keys.
19.4
Video on Demand
72
About Video on Demand
With Video on Demand , you can rent movies
from an online rental video store.
You can let Video on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of movies, based on your country,
the TV installation and the programmes you watch
regularly.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when Video on Demand is available.
Payment
When you rent or buy a movie, you can pay the video
store securely with your credit card. Most video
stores ask you to create a login account the first time
you rent a movie.
Internet Traffic
Streaming a lot of videos may cause you to exceed
your monthly Internet traffic limit.
Using Video on Demand
To open Video on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Video on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Select All Stores, Recommended,
or Popular for your preference.
4 - Press BACK to close.
When you open Video on Demand, the TV may need
a few seconds to refresh the page information.
You can select a specific video store if more than one
is available.
To rent a movie…
1 - Navigate the highlight on a movie poster. Limited
info will show after some seconds.
2 - Press OK to open the movie page of the video
store for a synopsis of the movie.
3 - Confirm your order.
4 - Make the payment on TV.
5 - Start watching. You can use the (Play)
and (Pause) keys.
73
20
Netflix
If you have a Netflix membership subscription, you
can enjoy Netflix on this TV. Your TV must be
connected to the Internet. In your region, Netflix
might only come available with future software
updates.
To open Netflix, press to open the Netflix
App. You can open Netflix immediately from a TV in
standby.
www.netflix.com
74
3 - Select Multi View: On on screen. The channel
you were watching appears in the small screen.
4 - Press or to switch channels in the
small screen.
21
Multi View
21.1
To hide the small screen, select Multi View: Off on
screen.
Text and TV
Note: Not every Nettv app can support Multi View
with a TV channel, if the app cannot support Multi
View, then TV will show a message: Multi View is not
supported.
You can watch a TV channel in the small screen of
Multi View when you're watching Text.
To watch a TV channel while watching Text…
* If Multi View key is available on your remote
control
1 - Press Multi View * or press to open TV
Menu.
2 - Select Multi View, and press OK.
3 - Select Multi View: On on screen. The channel
you were watching appears in the small screen.
21.4
Nettv and HDMI
To hide the small screen, select Multi View: Off on
screen.
* If Multi View key is available on your remote
control
You can watch a Nettv app in App Gallery in the
small screen of Multi View when you're watching
video from a connected HDMI device.
21.2
1 - Press Multi View * or press to open
Menu.
2 - Select Multi View, and press OK.
3 - Select Multi View: On on screen.
HDMI and TV
To hide the small screen, select Multi View: Off on
screen.
You can watch a TV channel in the small screen of
Multi View when you're watching video from a
connected HDMI device.
Note: Not every Nettv app can support Multi View
with a TV channel, if the app cannot support Multi
View, then TV will show a message: Multi View is not
supported.
To watch a TV channel while watching video from
connected HDMI device*…
1 - Press Multi View * or press to open TV
Menu.
2 - Select Multi View, and press OK.
3 - Select Multi View: On on screen. The channel
you were watching appears in the small screen.
* If Multi View key is available on your remote
control
To hide the small screen, select Multi View: Off on
screen.
Note: You can only watch TV channel image in Multi
view mode, the audio of TV channel will be mute.
* If Multi View key is available on your remote
control
21.3
Nettv and TV
You can watch a TV channel in the small screen of
Multi View when you're watching a Nettv app in App
Gallery.
To watch a TV channel while watching a Nettv app in
App Gallery*…
1 - Press Multi View * or press to open
Menu.
2 - Select Multi View, and press OK.
TV
TV
75
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into your computer.
2 - On the USB flash drive, locate the
file update.htm and double click it.
3 - Click Send ID.
4 - If new software is available, download the .zip
file.
5 - After the download, unzip the file and copy the
file autorun.upg onto the USB flash drive. Do not
place this file in a folder.
22
Software
22.1
Update Software
Update from Internet
Update the TV software
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into the TV again. The
update starts automatically.
2 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control. Do
not remove the USB flash drive.
3 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you may receive
a message to update the TV software. You need a
high-speed (broadband) Internet connection. If you
receive this message, we recommend you to carry out
the update.
With the message on screen, select Update and
follow the instructions on-screen.
If a power cut occurs during the update, never
remove the USB flash drive from the TV. When the
power returns, the update will continue.
You can also look for a software update yourself.
During the software update, there is no picture and
the TV will switch off and on again. This might happen
several times. The update can take a few minutes.
Wait until the TV picture comes back up. Do not press
the power switch on the TV or on the remote
control during the software update.
To prevent an accidental update of the TV software,
delete the autorun.upg file from the USB flash drive.
22.2
To look for a software update yourself…
Software Version
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Search for Updates.
3 - Select Internet.
4 - The TV will look for an update on the Internet.
5 - If an update is available, you can update the
software right away.
6 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control.
7 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
To view the current TV software version…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Current Software
Info and press OK.
3 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Update from USB
22.3
It might be necessary to update the TV software.
Open Source Software
You need a computer with an high-speed Internet
connection and a USB flash drive to upload the
software on the TV. Use a USB flash drive with at least
500MB free space. Make sure that write protection is
switched off.
This television contains open source software. TP
Vision Europe B.V. hereby offers to deliver, upon
request, a copy of the complete corresponding
source code for the copyrighted open source
software packages used in this product for which such
offer is requested by the respective licences.
To update the TV software…
This offer is valid up to three years after product
purchase to anyone in receipt of this information.
To obtain the source code, please write in English to .
..
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Search for Updates.
3 - Select USB and press OK.
Identify the TV
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into one of the USB
connections of the TV.
2 - Select Write to USB and press OK. An
identification file is written on the USB flash drive.
open.source@tpvision.com
Download the software
76
does *not* cover user programs that use kernel
services by normal system calls - this is merely
considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not*
fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note
that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it
refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and
others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only
valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is
concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie
v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly
otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds"
22.4
Open Source License
About Open Source License
README for the source code of the parts of TP Vision
Netherlands B.V. TV software that fall under open
source licenses.
This is a document describing the distribution of the
source code used on the TP Vision Netherlands B.V.
TV, which fall either under the GNU General Public
License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public
License (the LGPL), or any other open source license.
Instructions to obtain copies of this software can be
found in the Directions For Use.
libcurl (7.21.7)
libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL
transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS,
Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS,
POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP,
SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL
certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading,
HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies,
user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM,
Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy
tunneling and more! The original download site for
this software is :
http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/COPYRIGHT AND
PERMISSION NOTICE
TP Vision Netherlands B.V. MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE. TP Vision
Netherlands B.V. offers no support for this software.
The preceding does not affect your warranties and
statutory rights regarding any TP Vision Netherlands
B.V. product(s) you purchased. It only applies to this
source code made available to you.
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg,
daniel@haxx.se.All rights reserved. Permission to use,
copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
Open Source
Android (5.1.0)
This TV contains the Android Lollipop Software.
Android is a Linux-based operating system designed
primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as
smartphones and tablet computers. This software will
also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The
original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can
be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2
(http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html)
Toolbox (N/A)
The original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can
be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2
(http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html)
libfreetype (2.4.2)
FreeType is a software development library, available
in source and binary forms, used to render text on to
bitmaps and provides support for other font-related
operations
linux kernel (3.10.27)
This TV contains the Linux Kernel. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.kernel.org/.This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the GPL
v2 license, which can be found below. Additionally,
following exception applies : "NOTE! This copyright
The original download site for this software is : https:/
/github.com/julienr/libfreetype-androidFreetype
License
libjpeg (8a)
77
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
the code is thread safe. The data format used by the
zlib library is described by RFCs (Request for
Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1950 (zlib format), rfc1951
(deflate format) and rfc1952 (gzip format) Developed
by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler(C) 1995-2012
Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is
provided 'as-is', without any express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable
for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software
for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software
must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in the
product documentation would be appreciated but is
not required. 2. Altered source versions must be
plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This
notice may not be removed or altered from any
source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this
software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire
risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is
copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved except as specified below. Permission is
hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part
of the source code for this software is distributed,
then this README file must be included, with this
copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.(2) If only executable code is
distributed, then the accompanying documentation
must state that "this software is based in part on the
work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission
for use of this software is granted only if the user
accepts full responsibility for any undesirable
consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for
damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the IJG code, not
just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you
ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted
for the use of any IJG author's name or company
name in advertising or publicity relating to this
software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG
Group's software". We specifically permit and
encourage the use of this software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
dvbsnoop (1.2)
dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program.
For generating CRC32 values required for composing
PAT, PMT, EIT sections
The original download site for this software is : https:/
/github.com/a4tunado/dvbsnoop/blob/master/src/
misc/crc32.cGPL v2
http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html
ezxml (0.8.6)
ezXML is a C library for parsing XML documents.
The original download site for this software is :
http://ezxml.sourceforge.net.Copyright 2004, 2005
Aaron Voisine. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the MIT
license, which can be found below.
libpng (1.4.1)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng
license
gSoap (2.7.15)
The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++
software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web
services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data
bindings. Part of the software embedded in this
product is gSOAP software. Portions created by
gSOAP are Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van
Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE
SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART
PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
openssl (1.0.1j)
OpenSSL is an open-source implementation of the
SSL and TLS protocols. The core library, written in the
C programming language, implements the basic
cryptographic functions and provides various utility
functions. The original download site for this software
is : http://openssl.org/OpenSSL license
Zlib compression library (1.2.7)
zlib is a general purpose data compression library. All
78
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
restlet (2.1.7)
EMX (0.9c)
Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source
REST framework for the Java platform. Rest let is
suitable for both server and client Web applications. It
supports major Internet transport, data format, and
service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS,
SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original
download site for this software is :
http://restlet.orgThis piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
Apache License version 2.
Opera Web Browser (SDK 3.5)
Opera uses EMX, which is an OS/2 port of the gcc
suite. Opera uses modified versions of the sprintf and
sscanf methods from this C library.* The emx libraries
are not distributed under the GPL. Linking an *
application with the emx libraries does not cause the
executable * to be covered by the GNU General
Public License. You are allowed * to change and copy
the emx library sources if you keep the copyright *
message intact. If you improve the emx libraries,
please send your * enhancements to the emx author
(you should copyright your * enhancements similar to
the existing emx libraries).
This TV contains Opera Browser Software.
freetype (2.4.8)
dlmalloc (2.7.2)
Opera uses freetype FreeType 2 is a software-font
engine that is designed to be small, efficient, highly
customizable and portable, while capable of
producing high-quality output (glyph images).The
original download site for this software is : http://ww
w.freetype.org/freetype2/index.htmlFreetype License
Opera uses Doug Lea's memory allocator
The original download site for this software is :
http://gee.cs.oswego.edu/dl/html/malloc.html
double-conversion
HKSCS (2008)
Opera uses double-conversion library by Florian
Loitsch, faster double : string conversions (dtoa and
strtod).The original download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/doubleconversionCopyright 2006-2011, the V8 project
authors. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary
form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor
the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHTOWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
Opera uses HKSCS: The Government of the Hong
Kong Special Administrative Region HKSCS
mappingsThe original download site for this software
is : http://www.ogcio.gov.hkBefore downloading the
Software or Document provided on this Web page,
you should read the following terms (Terms of Use).
By downloading the Software and Document, you are
deemed to agree to these terms.1. The Government of
the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
(HKSARG) has the right to amend or vary the terms
under this Terms of Use from time to time at its sole
discretion.2. By using the Software and Document,
you irrevocably agree that the HKSARG may from
time to time vary this Terms of Use without further
notice to you and you also irrevocably agree to be
bound by the most updated version of the Terms of
Use.3. You have the sole responsibility of obtaining
the most updated version of the Terms of Use which
is available in the "Digital 21" Web site (http://www.og
cio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t
erms.htm).4. By accepting this Terms of Use, HKSARG
shall grant you a non-exclusive license to use the
Software and Document for any purpose, subject to
clause 5 below.5. You are not allowed to make copies
of the Software and Document except it is incidental
to and necessary for the normal use of the Software.
79
You are not allowed to adapt or modify the Software
and Document or to distribute, sell, rent, or make
available to the public the Software and Document,
including copies or an adaptation of them.6. The
Software and Document are protected by copyright.
The licensors of the Government of Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region are the owners of all
copyright works in the Software and Document. All
rights reserved.7. You understand and agree that use
of the Software and Document are at your sole risk,
that any material and/or data downloaded or
otherwise obtained in relation to the Software and
Document is at your discretion and risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage caused to
your computer system or loss of data or any other
loss that results from the download and use of the
Software and Document in any manner whatsoever.8.
In relation to the Software and Document, HKSARG
hereby disclaims all warranties and conditions,
including all implied warranties and conditions of
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and
non-infringement.9. HKSARG will not be liable for any
direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential
loss of any kind resulting from the use of or the
inability to use the Software and Document even if
HKSARG has been advised of the possibility of such
loss.10. You agree not to sue HKSARG and agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless HKSARG, its
officers and employees from any and all third party
claims, liability, damages and/or costs (including, but
not limited to, legal fees) arising from your use of the
Software and Document, your violation of the Terms
of Use or infringement of any intellectual property or
other right of any person or entity.11. The Terms of Use
will be governed by and construed in accordance
with the laws of Hong Kong.12. Any waiver of any
provision of the Terms of Use will be effective only if
in writing and signed by HKSARG or its
representative.13. If for any reason a court of
competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion
of the Terms of Use to be unenforceable, the
remainder of the Terms of Use will continue in full
force and effect.14. The Terms of Use constitute the
entire agreement between the parties with respect to
the subject matter hereof and supersedes and
replaces all prior or contemporaneous
understandings or agreements, written or oral,
regarding such subject matter.15.In addition to the
licence granted in Clause 4, HKSARG hereby grants
you a non-exclusive limited licence to reproduce and
distribute the Software and Document with the
following conditions:(i) not for financial gain unless it
is incidental;(ii) reproduction and distribution of the
Software and Document in complete and unmodified
form; and(iii) when you distribute the Software and
Document, you agree to attach the Terms of Use and
a statement that the latest version of the Terms of
Use is available from the "Office of the Government
Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://www.ogcio
.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/term
s.htm).
IANA (Dec 30 2013)
Opera uses Internet Assigned Numbers Authority:
Character encoding tag names and numbers. The
original download site for this software is :
https://www.iana.org
ICU (3)
Opera uses ICU : International Components for
Unicode: Mapping table for GB18030The original
download site for this software is : http://site.icu-proj
ect.org/http://source.icuproject.org/repos/icu/icu/trunk/license.html
MozTW (1.0)
Opera uses MoxTW : MozTW project: Big5-2003
mapping tables. The original download site for this
software is : https://moztw.orgThis piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
CCPL
NPAPI (0.27)
Opera uses NPAPI : Netscape 4 Plugin API: npapi.h,
npfunctions.h, npruntime.h and nptypes.h. Distributed
as part of the Netscape 4 Plugin SDK.The original
download site for this software is : wiki.mozilla.orgThis
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of mozilla licencse as described
below.
Unicode (4.0)
Opera uses Unicode : Data from the Unicode
character database. The original download site for
this software is : www.unicode.orghttp://www.unicod
e.org/copyright.html
Webp (0.2.0)
Opera uses Webp : libwebp is a library for decoding
images in the WebP format. Products may use it to
decode WebP images. The turbo servers will
eventually re-decode images to WebP. The original
download site for this software is :
https://developers.google.com/speed/webp/?csw=1
https://chromium.googlesource.com/webm/libwebp/
Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents)"This
implementation" means the copyrightable works
distributed by Google as part of the WebM
Project.Google hereby grants to you a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section)patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import, transfer, and otherwise run, modify and
propagate the contents of this implementation of
VP8, where such license applies only to those patent
claims, both currently owned by Google and acquired
in the future, licensable by Google that are
necessarily infringed by this implementation of VP8.
This grant does not include claims that would be
infringed only as a consequence of further
80
modification of this implementation. If you or your
agent or exclusive licensee institute or order or agree
to the institution of patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that this implementation of VP8 or any code
incorporated within this implementation of VP8
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement,
or inducement of patent infringement, then any
patent rights granted to you under this License for this
implementation of VP8shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
be found below.
live555 (0.82)
Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.live555.comThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below.
Bluetooth Stack (Bluedroid)
This TV uses Bluetooth stack. The original download
site for this software is :This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Android
Apache License Version 2.
FaceBook SDK (3.0.1)
This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK
for Android is the easiest way to integrate your
Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK
provides support for Login with Facebook
authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs
and support for UI elements such as pickers and
dialogs. The original download site for this software is
: https://developer.facebook.com/docs/androidThis
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the Apache License version 2.
EXIF (NA)
Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.sentex.net/~mwandel/jhead/Portions of
this source code are in the public domain
Copyright (c) 2008, The Android Open Source Project
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source
and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are
met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution. * Neither the name of The Android
Open Source Project nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written
permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THECOPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING,BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSSOF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUTOF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.
iptables (1.4.7)
iptables is a user space application program that
allows a system administrator to configure the tables
provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as
different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it
stores. Different kernel modules and programs are
currently used for different protocols; iptables applies
to IPv4The original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.comThis piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2.
libyuv (814)
libyuv is an open source project that includes YUV
conversion and scaling functionality. The original
download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/libyuvThis piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions BSD.
ffmpeg (2.1.3)
This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, crossplatform solution to record, convert and stream audio
and video. The original download site for this
software is : http://ffmpeg.orgThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based
on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be
installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test
the hardware or to download and run application
code
EXPAT (2.1.0)
EXPAT is a XML Parser. The original download site for
this software is :
http://expat.sourceforge.netCopyright (c) 1998, 1999,
2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and
This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can
81
Clark Cooper
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN
THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder. All trademarks
and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the
property of their respective owners.
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers. Permission is hereby granted, free
of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights to
use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions: The above
copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT,TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
IPRoute2 (NA)
IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP, Networking and Traffic
control. The original download site for this software is
: http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgr
oups/networking/iproute2This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
GPL V2.
mtpd (NA)
mtpd is used for VPN Network. The original download
site for this software is :
http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
neven face recognition library (NA)
This TV uses neven face recognition library which is
used for face recognitionThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Android Apache License version 2.
MDNS Responder (NA)
MDNS Responder. The Mdns Responder project is a
component of Bonjour, Apple's ease-of-use IP
networking initiative. The original download site for
this software is : http://www.opensource.apple.com/t
arballs/mDNSResponder/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
Unicode (4.8.1.1)
This TV uses Unicode which specifies the
representation of text
The original download site for this software is :
http://icu-project.orgICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
NFC (NA)
Copyright (c) 1995-2008 International Business
Machines Corporation and others
NFC Semiconductor's NFC Library. Near Field
Communication (NFC) is a set of short-range wireless
technologies, typically requiring a distance of 4cm or
less to initiate a connection. NFC allows you to share
small payloads of data between an NFC tag and an
Android-powered device, or between two Androidpowered devices. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free
of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights to
use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided
that the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear in all copies of the Software and that
both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in supporting
documentation. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS
IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
Skia (NA)
Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text,
Geometries, and Images. The original download site
for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/skia/Copyright (c) 2011
Google Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use
in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of
82
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. *
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution. *
Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHTOWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
the following copyright and permission notices on
STLport sources and its documentation unchanged
:Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no
warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own
risk. Permission to use or copy this software for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the
above notices are retained on all copies. Permission
to modify the code and to distribute modified code is
granted, provided the above notices are retained, and
a notice that the code was modified is included with
the above copyright notice. The Licensee may
distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether
original or modified) without any royalties or
restrictions. The Licensee may distribute original or
modified STLport sources, provided that: The
conditions indicated in the above permission notice
are met; The following copyright notices are retained
when present, and conditions provided in
accompanying permission notices are met :Copyright
1994 Hewlett-Packard Company Copyright 1996,97
Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc. Copyright
1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell
this software and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that the
above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation. HewlettPackard Company makes no representations about
the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell
this software and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that the
above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics
makes no representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty. Permission to use, copy,
modify, distribute and sell this software and its
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation. Moscow Center for
SPARC Technology makes no representations about
the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
Sonic Audio Synthesis library (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.sonivoxmi.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
Sqlite (3071100)
The original download site for this software is :
www.sqlite.org.This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
Nuance Speech Recognition engine (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
C++Standard Template Library library (5)
This TV uses Implementation of the C++ Standard
Template Library. The original download site for this
software is : http://stlport.sourceforge.netBoris
Fomitchev grants Licensee a non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use STLport and
its documentation without fee. By downloading,
using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof,
Licensee agrees to abide by the intellectual property
laws and all other applicable laws of the United
States of America, and to all of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Licensee shall maintain
svox (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
tinyalsa (NA)
This TV uses tinyalsa: a small library to interface with
ALSA in the Linux kernel The original download site
83
for this software is :
http://github.com/tinyalsaCopyright 2011, The
Android Open Source Project Redistribution and use
in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. *
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution. *
Neither the name of The Android Open Source
Project nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY The Android Open
Source Project ``AS IS'' ANDANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL The Android Open Source Project BE
LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS ORSERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVERCAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAYOUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGE.
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATIONOR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOTLIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANYTHEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
wpa_supplicant_Daemon (v0.8)
Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant
daemonThe original download site for this software is
: http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of GPL version 2.
gson (2.3)
Gson is a Java library that can be used to convert
Java Objects into their JSON representation. It can
also be used to convert a JSON string to an
equivalent Java object. Gson can work with arbitrary
Java objects including pre-existing objects that you
do not have source-code of. The original download
site for this software is :
https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/This piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License 2.0
Vorbis Decompression Library (NA)
This software includes an implementation of the AES
Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman
This TV uses Tremolo ARM-optimized Ogg Vorbis
decompression library. Vorbis is a general purpose
audio and music encoding format contemporary to
MPEG-4's AAC and TwinVQ, the next generation
beyond MPEG audio layer 3The original download
site for this software is :
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremoCopyright (c)
2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation Redistribution and
use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:- Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copy right notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.gladman.me.uk/This piece of software is
licensed by Brian Gladman
libUpNp (1.2.1)
The original download site for this software is :
http://upnp.sourceforge.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
BSD.
dnsmasq
Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS
forwarder and DHCP server
The original download site for this software is : https:/
/android.googlesource.com/platform/external/dnma
sqThis piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which can
be found below.
TomCrypt (1.1)
iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption
84
The original download site for this software is : http://
manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man3/libto
mcrypt.3.htmlThis piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the DO WHAT THE
FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
AsyncHttpclient (1.4.6)
For example, if you distribute copies of such a
program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
The original download site for this software is :
http://loopj.com/android-async-http/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
Jackson Parser (2.x)
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright
the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string
manipualation. The original download site for this
software is : https://github.com/FasterXML/jacksoncoreThis piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want
to make certain that everyone understands that there
is no warranty for this free software. If the software is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original, so that any problems introduced by others
will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
TP Vision Netherlands B.V. is grateful to the groups
and individuals above for their contributions.
_________________________________
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear
that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free
use or not licensed at all.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301, USA
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is
not restricted, and the output from the Program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based
on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true
depends on what the Program does.
of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of
the Free Software Foundation's software and to any
other program whose authors commit to using it.
(Some other Free Software Foundation software is
covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
a) You must cause the modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed
as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most
85
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and
telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does
not normally print such an announcement, your work
based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
executable. However, as a special exception, the
source code distributed need not include anything
that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place counts as distribution of the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented
by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Program with the Program (or with a
work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage
or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this
License, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
NO WARRANTY
c) Accompany it with the information you received as
to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
________________________________
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
The source code for a work means the preferred form
of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the
source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA
86
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies
passed on, the recipients should know that what they
have is not the original version, so that the original
author's reputation will not be affected by problems
that might be introduced by others.
of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make sure
that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of
a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from
a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent
license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in
this license.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number
2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License,
applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite
different from the ordinary General Public License.
We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a
derivative of the original library. The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if
the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The
Lesser General Public License permits more lax
criteria for linking other code with the library.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do
these things.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It
also provides other free software developers Less of
an advantage over competing non-free programs.
These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use of
a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is
that a free library does the same job as widely used
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by
limiting the free library to free software only, so we
use the Lesser General Public License.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in
non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For
example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library
has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very
clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and
87
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on
the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library
in order to run.
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".)
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using
the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the
same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
?a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
?b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
?c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
?d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether
88
this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
?e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the materials
to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these
things:
?a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of
the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
?b) Give prominent notice with the combined library
of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
?a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
?b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already
present on the user's computer system, rather than
copying library functions into the executable, and (2)
will operate properly with a modified version of the
library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified
version is interface-compatible with the version that
the work was made with.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
?c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
?d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
89
NO WARRANTY
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
_______________________________
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
BSD LICENSE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
_____________________________
Apache
License
Version 2.0,
January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
______________________________
1. Definitions.
MIT LICENSE
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions
for use, reproduction,
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or
entity authorized by
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the
acting entity and all
the following conditions:
other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
control with that entity. For the purposes of
this definition,
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
"control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity,
90
whether by contract or
"Contribution" shall mean any work of
authorship, including
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the
the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or
Legal Entity
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of
exercising permissions granted by this License.
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this
definition, "submitted"
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form
for making modifications,
means any form of electronic, verbal, or
written communication sent
including but not limited to software source
code, documentation
to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to
source, and configuration files.
communication on electronic mailing lists,
source code control systems,
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting
from mechanical
and issue tracking systems that are managed
by, or on behalf of, the
transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but
not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation,
excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise
and conversions to other media types.
designated in writing by the copyright owner
as "Not a Contribution."
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship,
whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity
copyright notice that is included in or attached
to the work
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
(an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work,
whether in Source or Object
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations,
or other modifications
copyright license to reproduce, prepare
Derivative Works of,
represent, as a whole, an original work of
authorship. For the purposes
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense,
and distribute the
of this License, Derivative Works shall not
include works that remain
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form.
separable from, or merely link (or bind by
name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
91
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form
of the Work,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable
excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of
(except as stated in this section) patent license
to make, have made,
the Derivative Works; and
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work,
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as
part of its
where such license applies only to those
patent claims licensable
distribution, then any Derivative Works
that You distribute must
by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their
include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of
their Contribution(s)
within such NOTICE file, excluding those
notices that do not
with the Work to which such Contribution(s)
was submitted. If You
pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works, in at least one
institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a
of the following places: within a NOTICE
text file distributed
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work
as part of the Derivative Works; within
the Source form or
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct
documentation, if provided along with
the Derivative Works; or,
or contributory patent infringement, then any
patent licenses
within a display generated by the
Derivative Works, if and
granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate
wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents
as of the date such litigation is filed.
of the NOTICE file are for informational
purposes only and
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and
distribute copies of the
do not modify the License. You may add
Your own attribution
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without
notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside
modifications, and in Source or Object form,
provided that You
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text
from the Work, provided
meet the following conditions:
that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed
(a) You must give any other recipients of the
Work or
as modifying the License.
Derivative Works a copy of this License;
and
You may add Your own copyright statement to
Your modifications and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices
may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions
stating that You changed the files; and
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your
modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use,
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works
reproduction, and distribution of the Work
that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
92
otherwise complies with
contract, or otherwise,
the conditions stated in this License.
unless required by applicable law (such as
deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall
any Contributor be
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You
explicitly state otherwise,
liable to You for damages, including any
direct, indirect, special,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work
incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a
by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of
result of this License or out of the use or
inability to use the
this License, without any additional terms or
conditions.
Work (including but not limited to damages for
loss of goodwill,
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein
shall supersede or modify
work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all
the terms of any separate license agreement
you may have executed
other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant
permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor,
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While
redistributing
except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may
choose to offer,
origin of the Work and reproducing the
content of the NOTICE file.
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by
applicable law or
License. However, in accepting such
obligations, You may act only
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each
on Your own behalf and on Your sole
responsibility, not on behalf
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree
to indemnify,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless
for any liability
implied, including, without limitation, any
warranties or conditions
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
of your accepting any such warranty or
additional liability.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to
your work.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no
legal theory,
To apply the Apache License to your work,
attach the following
whether in tort (including negligence),
93
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]"
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
replaced with your own identifying
information. (Don't include
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in
the appropriate
this sentence.
comment syntax for the file format. We also
recommend that a
This code is released under the libpng license.
file or class name and description of purpose
be included on the
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1,
February 25, 2010, are
same "printed page" as the copyright notice
for easier
Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2007 Glenn RandersPehrson, and are
identification within third-party archives.
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.2.5
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0
(the "License");
Cosmin Truta
you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 October 3, 2002, are
You may obtain a copy of the License at
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson,
and are
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
distributed under the License is distributed on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
See the License for the specific language
governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
library or against infringement. There is no
warranty that our
_____________________________
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in
the file png.h that is
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall
prevail.
the user.
94
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed
or implied,
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and
are
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96,
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc.
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary,
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Tom Lane
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,
without fee, subject
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.88,
to the following restrictions:
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
be misrepresented as being the original source.
John Bowler
source or altered source distribution.
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
Tom Tanner
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
is defined as the following set of individuals:
boxes and the like:
Andreas Dilger
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the
Paul Schmidt
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
95
Certified Open Source is a
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
This license was inspired by the BSD,
Artistic, and IJG
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
February 25, 2010
and use of free software in commercial and
freeware products
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
_____________________________
This software is based in part on the work of the
FreeType Team.
o We don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be
----------------------
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution)
LICENSE
o You can use this software for whatever you
want, in parts or
----------------------------
full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage)
The FreeType Project
o You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use
2006-Jan-27
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you
must acknowledge
Copyright 1996-2002,
2006 by
somewhere in your documentation that
you have used the
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this
Introduction
software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products.
============
We disclaim all warranties covering The
FreeType Project and
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages;
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
some of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or
relate to, the
Finally, many people asked us for a
preferred form for a
FreeType Project.
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this
license. We thus
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and
encourage you to use the following text:
which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license
"""
Portions of this software are copyright ?
The FreeType
affects thus the FreeType font engine,
the test programs,
96
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
by David Turner,
"""
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as
specified below.
Please replace with the value from the
FreeType version you
actually use.
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
Legal Terms
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
===========
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
--------------
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project',
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of
files originally
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
distributed by the authors (David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and
-----------------
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they
named as alpha,
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free,
perpetual and
beta or final release.
irrevocable right and license to use, execute,
perform, compile,
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where
display, copy, create derivative works of,
distribute and
`using' is a generic term including compiling the
project's source
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source
and object code
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'.
forms) and derivative works thereof for any
purpose; and to
This program is referred to as `a program
using the FreeType
authorize others to exercise some or all of the
rights granted
engine'.
herein, subject to the following conditions:
This license applies to all files distributed in
the original
o Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file
FreeType Project, including all source
code, binaries and
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to
documentation, unless otherwise stated in
the file in its
the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying
original, unmodified form as distributed in the
original archive.
documentation. The copyright notices
of the unaltered,
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file
is covered by
original files must be preserved in all
copies of source
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
files.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000
97
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that
-----------
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
FreeType Team, in the distribution
documentation. We also
o freetype@nongnu.org
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType
web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on
future and wanted additions to the library
and distribution.
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified
files. If you use
If you are looking for support, start in this
list if you
our work, you must acknowledge us. However,
no fee need be paid
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation.
to us.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
-------------Discusses bugs, as well as engine
internals, design issues,
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors
nor you shall use
specific licenses, porting, etc.
the name of the other for commercial, advertising,
or promotional
Our home page can be found at
purposes without specific prior written permission.
http://www.freetype.org
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one
or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
`FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
_____________________________
As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
accept it. However, as the FreeType
Project is copyrighted
material, only this license, or another one
contracted with the
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e.
both the conditions of
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute,
and modify it.
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay
license apply to the toolkit.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying
the FreeType
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both
licenses are BSD-style
Project, you indicate that you understand and
accept all the terms
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
of this license.
98
called "OpenSSL"
OpenSSL License
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names
without prior written
---------------
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
/*
===========================
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must
retain the following
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
*
*
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
acknowledgment:
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
*
* are met:
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
*
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
*
*
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* software must display the following
acknowledgment:
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
===========================
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL
Project" must not be used to
*
distribution.
*
* This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young
* endorse or promote products derived from this
software without
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes
software written by Tim
* prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
*
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
*
*/
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be
99
Original SSLeay License
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
-----------------------
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software
* All rights reserved.
*
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* "This product includes cryptographic software
written by
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
*
* The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the
rouines from the library
*
*
* This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a
derivative thereof) from
* the following conditions are aheared to. The
following conditions
* the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA,
* "This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG
``AS IS'' AND
* included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any
Copyright notices in
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* the code are not to be removed.
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* This can be in the form of a textual message at
program startup or
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with
the package.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
*
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* SUCH DAMAGE.
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright
* The licence and distribution terms for any
publically available version or
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
100
*/
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by Exhibit
A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which
combines Covered Code or
_____________________________
MOZILLA PUBLIC
portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
LICENSE
Version 1.1
1.8. "License" means this document.
--------------1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to
grant, to the maximum
extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or
otherwise making the
subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights
conveyed herein.
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates
or contributes to
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or
deletion from the
the creation of Modifications.
substance or structure of either the Original
Code or any previous
Modifications. When Covered Code is released
as a series of files, a
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the
combination of the Original
Modification is:
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications
A. Any addition to or deletion from the
contents of a file
made by that particular Contributor.
containing Original Code or previous
Modifications.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or
Modifications or the
B. Any new file that contains any part of
the Original Code or
combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case
previous Modifications.
including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means
a mechanism generally
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of
computer software code
accepted in the software development
community for the electronic
which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as
Original Code, and which, at the time of its
release under this
transfer of data.
License is not already Covered Code governed
by this License.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any
form other than Source
Code.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent
claim(s), now owned or
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or
entity identified
hereafter acquired, including without
limitation, method, process,
101
and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable
by grantor.
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce,
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of
the Covered Code for
modify, display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Original
making modifications to it, including all modules
it contains, plus
Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or
any associated interface definition files, scripts
used to control
as part of a Larger Work; and
compilation and installation of an Executable,
or source code
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the
making, using or
differential comparisons against either the
Original Code or another
selling of Original Code, to make, have
made, use, practice,
well known, available Covered Code of the
Contributor's choice. The
sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise
dispose of the
Source Code can be in a compressed or
archival form, provided the
Original Code (or portions thereof).
appropriate decompression or de-archiving
software is widely available
(c) the licenses granted in this Section
2.1(a) and (b) are
for no charge.
effective on the date Initial Developer
first distributes
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a
legal entity
Original Code under the terms of this
License.
exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this
License or a future version of this License
issued under Section 6.1.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above,
no patent license is
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity
which controls, is
granted: 1) for code that You delete from
the Original Code; 2)
controlled by, or is under common control with
You. For purposes of
separate from the Original Code; or 3)
for infringements caused
this definition, "control" means (a) the power,
direct or indirect,
by: i) the modification of the Original
Code or ii) the
to cause the direction or management of such
entity, whether by
combination of the Original Code with
other software or devices.
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more
than fifty percent
2.2. Contributor Grant.
(50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such
Subject to third party intellectual property
claims, each Contributor
entity.
hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free,
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify,
non-exclusive license, subject to third party
intellectual property
display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Modifications
claims:
102
created by such Contributor (or portions
thereof) either on an
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which
You contribute are
unmodified basis, with other
Modifications, as Covered Code
governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
Section 2.2. The Source Code version of
Covered Code may be
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the
making, using, or
distributed only under the terms of this License
or a future version
selling of Modifications made by that
Contributor either alone
of this License released under Section 6.1, and
You must include a
and/or in combination with its
Contributor Version (or portions
copy of this License with every copy of the
Source Code You
of such combination), to make, use, sell,
offer for sale, have
distribute. You may not offer or impose any
terms on any Source Code
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that
version that alters or restricts the applicable
version of this
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2)
the combination of
License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include
Modifications made by that Contributor
with its Contributor
an additional document offering the additional
rights described in
Version (or portions of such
combination).
Section 3.5.
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a)
and 2.2(b) are
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which
You contribute must be
effective on the date Contributor first
makes Commercial Use of
made available in Source Code form under the
terms of this License
the Covered Code.
either on the same media as an Executable
version or via an accepted
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b)
above, no patent license is
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to
whom you made an
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor
has deleted from the
Executable version available; and if made
available via Electronic
Contributor Version; 2) separate from
the Contributor Version;
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available
for at least twelve (12)
3) for infringements caused by: i) third
party modifications of
months after the date it initially became
available, or at least six
Contributor Version or ii) the
combination of Modifications made
(6) months after a subsequent version of that
particular Modification
by that Contributor with other software
(except as part of the
has been made available to such recipients.
You are responsible for
Contributor Version) or other devices; or
4) under Patent Claims
ensuring that the Source Code version remains
available even if the
infringed by Covered Code in the
absence of Modifications made by
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained
by a third party.
that Contributor.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
103
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a
interface and Contributor has knowledge
of patent licenses which
file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and
are reasonably necessary to implement
that API, Contributor must
the date of any change. You must include a
prominent statement that
also include this information in the
LEGAL file.
the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly,
from Original
(c)
Code provided by the Initial Developer and
including the name of the
Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as
disclosed pursuant to
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b)
in any notice in an
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor
believes that Contributor's
Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the
Modifications are Contributor's original
creation(s) and/or
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
this License.
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a
license under a third party's
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in
each file of the Source
intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights
Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in
a particular Source
granted by such Contributor under
Sections 2.1 or 2.2,
Code file due to its structure, then You must
include such notice in a
Contributor must include a text file with
the Source Code
location (such as a relevant directory) where a
user would be likely
distribution titled "LEGAL" which
describes the claim and the
to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more Modification(s)
party making the claim in sufficient detail
that a recipient will
You may add your name as a Contributor to the
notice described in
know whom to contact. If Contributor
obtains such knowledge after
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation
the Modification is made available as
described in Section 3.2,
for the Source Code where You describe
recipients' rights or ownership
Contributor shall promptly modify the
LEGAL file in all copies
rights relating to Covered Code. You may
choose to offer, and to
Contributor makes available thereafter
and shall take other steps
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability
(such as notifying appropriate mailing
lists or newsgroups)
obligations to one or more recipients of
Covered Code. However, You
reasonably calculated to inform those
who received the Covered
may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on
behalf of the Initial
Code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it
absolutely clear than
(b) Contributor APIs.
any such warranty, support, indemnity or
liability obligation is
If Contributor's Modifications include an
application programming
offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to
104
indemnify the Initial
terms You offer.
Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by the
3.7. Larger Works.
Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result
of warranty,
You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
not governed by the terms of this License and
distribute the Larger
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
Work as a single product. In such a case, You
must make sure the
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable
form only if the
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the
Covered Code.
requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met
for that Covered Code,
and if You include a notice stating that the
Source Code version of
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of
the terms of this
the Covered Code is available under the terms
of this License,
License with respect to some or all of the
Covered Code due to
including a description of how and where You
have fulfilled the
statute, judicial order, or regulation then You
must: (a) comply with
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be
conspicuously included
the terms of this License to the maximum extent
possible; and (b)
in any notice in an Executable version, related
documentation or
describe the limitations and the code they
affect. Such description
collateral in which You describe recipients'
rights relating to the
must be included in the LEGAL file described in
Section 3.4 and must
Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered
be included with all distributions of the Source
Code. Except to the
Code or ownership rights under a license of
Your choice, which may
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be
contain terms different from this License,
provided that You are in
sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to
compliance with the terms of this License and
that the license for the
understand it.
Executable version does not attempt to limit or
alter the recipient's
rights in the Source Code version from the rights
set forth in this
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has
License. If You distribute the Executable version
under a different
attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
license You must make it absolutely clear that
any terms which differ
from this License are offered by You alone, not
by the Initial
6.1. New Versions.
Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree
to indemnify the
Netscape Communications Corporation
("Netscape") may publish revised
Initial Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by
and/or new versions of the License from time to
time. Each version
the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a
result of any such
will be given a distinguishing version number.
105
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
Once Covered Code has been published under
a particular version of the
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT,
License, You may always continue to use it
under the terms of that
YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE
version. You may also choose to use such
Covered Code under the terms
COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
of any subsequent version of the License
published by Netscape. No one
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
other than Netscape has the right to modify the
terms applicable to
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
8.1. This License and the rights granted
hereunder will terminate
If You create or use a modified version of this
License (which you may
automatically if You fail to comply with terms
herein and fail to cure
only do in order to apply it to code which is not
already Covered Code
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware
of the breach. All
governed by this License), You must (a) rename
Your license so that
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are
properly granted shall
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape",
survive any termination of this License.
Provisions which, by their
"MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase
do not appear in your
nature, must remain in effect beyond the
termination of this License
license (except to note that your license differs
from this License)
shall survive.
and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your
version of the license
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a
patent infringement
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public License and
claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against Initial Developer
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of
the Initial
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or
Contributor against whom
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the
notice described in
You file such action is referred to as
"Participant") alleging that:
Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to
be modifications of
this License.)
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any and all rights
granted by such
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2
of this License
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT
THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice
You either: (i)
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
106
royalty for Your past and future use of
Modifications made by such
which have been validly granted by You or any
distributor hereunder
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim
with respect to
prior to termination shall survive termination.
the Contributor Version against such
Participant. If within 60 days
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment
arrangement are not
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties
or the litigation claim
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,
is not withdrawn, the rights granted by
Participant to You under
OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate
at the expiration of
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
the 60 day notice period specified above.
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other
than such Participant's
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF
SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
any rights granted to You by such Participant
under Sections 2.1(b)
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date
You first made, used,
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR
DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
Participant.
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim
against Participant
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
alleging that such Participant's Contributor
Version directly or
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim
is resolved (such as
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of
patent
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as
that term is defined in
infringement litigation, then the reasonable
value of the licenses
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer
granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1
or 2.2 shall be taken
software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such
into account in determining the amount or
value of any payment or
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48
license.
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4 (June 1995),
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections
8.1 or 8.2 above,
all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered
Code with only those
all end user license agreements (excluding
distributors and resellers)
rights set forth herein.
107
herein is intended or
shall be deemed to constitute any admission of
liability.
This License represents the complete
agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is
held to be
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as
unenforceable, such provision shall be
reformed only to the extent
"Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed"
means that the Initial
necessary to make it enforceable. This License
shall be governed by
Developer permits you to utilize portions of the
Covered Code under
California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative
licenses, if any, specified
any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflictof-law provisions.
by the Initial Developer in the file described in
Exhibit A.
With respect to disputes in which at least one
party is a citizen of,
or an entity chartered or registered to do
business in the United
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
States of America, any litigation relating to this
License shall be
``The contents of this file are subject to the
Mozilla Public License
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts
of the Northern
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in
District of California, with venue lying in Santa
Clara County,
compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the License at
California, with the losing party responsible for
costs, including
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and
Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS"
expenses. The application of the United Nations
Convention on
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is
expressly excluded.
License for the specific language governing
rights and limitations
Any law or regulation which provides that the
language of a contract
under the License.
shall be construed against the drafter shall not
apply to this
The Original Code is _________.
License.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
______.
As between Initial Developer and the
Contributors, each party is
Portions created by _______ are Copyright (C)
______. All Rights Reserved.
responsible for claims and damages arising,
directly or indirectly,
Contributor(s): __________.
out of its utilization of rights under this License
and You agree to
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be
used under the terms
work with Initial Developer and Contributors to
distribute such
of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing
108
which case the
kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely
considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not*
fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note
that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it
refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and
others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only
valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is
concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie
v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly
otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds"
provisions of [______] License are applicable
instead of those
above. If you wish to allow use of your version
of this file only
under the terms of the [____] License and not to
allow others to use
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate
your decision by
deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice and
libcurl (7.50.1)
other provisions required by the [___] License.
If you do not delete
libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL
transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS,
Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS,
POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP,
SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL
certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading,
HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies,
user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM,
Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy
tunneling and more! The original download site for
this software is : http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c)
1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg, daniel@haxx.se. All
rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the
above copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
use or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ
slightly from the text of
the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should
use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text
found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your
Modifications.]
Open Source
Android (7.1.1)
This tv contains the Android Nougat Software.
Android is a Linux-based operating system designed
primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as
smartphones and tablet computers. This software will
also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The
original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/. This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can
be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2 (
http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html ).
This includes all external sources used by official
Android AOSP.
libfreetypeex (2.4.2)
linux kernel (3.10.79)
FreeType is a software development library, available
in source and binary forms, used to render text on to
bitmaps and provides support for other font-related
operations. The original download site for this
software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libfreetype-android
Freetype License
This tv contains the Linux Kernel. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.kernel.org/ . This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
Additionally, following exception applies: "NOTE! This
copyright does *not* cover user programs that use
109
libjpegex (8a)
http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.----------------------The
authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this
software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire
risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is
copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved except as specified below. Permission is
hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part
of the source code for this software is distributed,
then this README file must be included, with this
copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.(2) If only executable code is
distributed, then the accompanying documentation
must state that "this software is based in part on the
work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission
for use of this software is granted only if the user
accepts full responsibility for any undesirable
consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for
damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the IJG code, not
just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you
ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted
for the use of any IJG author's name or company
name in advertising or publicity relating to this
software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG
Group's software". We specifically permit and
encourage the use of this software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
gSoap (2.7.15)
The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++
software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web
services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data
bindings. Part of the software embedded in this
product is gSOAP software. Portions created by
gSOAP are Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van
Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE
SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART
PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
restlet (2.3.0)
Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source
REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is
suitable for both server and client Web applications. It
supports major Internet transport, data format, and
service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS,
SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original
download site for this software is : http://restlet.org
This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2.
libpngex (1.4.1)
FaceBook SDK (3.0.1)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng
license
This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK
for Android is the easiest way to integrate your
Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK
provides support for Login with Facebook
authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs
and support for UI elements such as pickers and
dialogs. The original download site for this software is
: https://developer.facebook.com/docs/android This
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the Apache License version 2.
dvbsnoop (1.2)
dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program.
For generating CRC32 values required for composing
PAT, PMT, EIT sections The original download site for
this software is : https://github.com/a4tunado/dvbsn
oop/blob/master/src/misc/crc32.cGPL v2
ffmpeg (2.1.3)
This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, cross-
110
platform solution to record, convert and stream audio
and video. The original download site for this
software is : http://ffmpeg.org This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
the GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
WHAT THE FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE.
u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based
on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be
installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test
the hardware or to download and run application
code. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which
can be found below.
gson (2.3)
This TV uses gson. Gson is a Java library that can be
used to convert Java Objects into their JSON
representation. It can also be used to convert a JSON
string to an equivalent Java object. Gson can work
with arbitrary Java objects including pre-existing
objects that you do not have source-code of. The
original download site for this software is :
https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/ . This piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License 2.0
AsyncHttpclient (1.4.9)
The original download site for this software is :
http://loopj.com/android-async-http/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
This software includes an implementation of the AES
Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.gladman.me.uk/ This piece of software is
licensed by Brian Gladman.
httpclient-4.4.1.1 (4.4.1.1)
This is needed to import
cz.msebera.android.httpclient used by
AssyncHttpClientThe original download site for this
software is :
http://mvnrepository.com/artifact/cz.msebera.androi
d/httpclient/4.4.1.1 This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
APACHE LICENSE 2.0
libUpNp (1.2.1)
The original download site for this software is :
http://upnp.sourceforge.net/ This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
BSD.
Jackson Parser (2.x)
Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string
manipulation. The original download site for this
software is :
https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-core This
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
live555 (0.82)
Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.live555.com This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below.
audio a2dp (2.x)
Bluetooth stack. The original download site for this
software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/platform/system/
bt This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
dnsmasq
Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS
forwarder and DHCP server. The original download
site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/platform/external/
dnmasq This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license,
which can be found below.
libexif (0.6.21)
Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original
download site for this software is :
http://libexif.sourceforge.net/ This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
TomCrypt (1.1)
iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption. The
original download site for this software is :
http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man
3/libtomcrypt.3.html This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the DO
libexpat (2.1.0)
111
Expat XML Parser. The original download site for this
software is : http://www.libexpat.org/Expat is free
software. You may copy, distribute, and modify it
under the terms of the License contained in the file
COPYING distributed with this package. This license is
the same as the MIT/X Consortium license.
libnfc_ndef ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Apache license
version 2
libFFTEm ( )
libskia ( )
neven face recognition library. The original download
site for this software is : No info. This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
skia 2D graphics library Skia is a complete 2D graphic
library for drawing Text, Geometries, and Images. The
original download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/skia/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the BSD.
libicui18n (49.1.1)
International Components for unicode. The original
download site for this software is : http://icuproject.org This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the BSD.
libsonivox ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE
License Version 2.
libiprouteutil (3.4.0)
iproute2 TCP/IP networking and traffic control. The
original download site for this software is :
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2. which can be found below
libsqlite (3.9.2)
SQLite database. The original download site for this
software is : http://www.sqlite.org This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2.
libjpeg (3.4.0)
libjpeg-turbo is a JPEG image codec that uses SIMD
instructions (MMX, SSE2, NEON) to accelerate
baseline JPEG compression and decompression on
x86, x86-64, and ARM systems. The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.ijg.org/libjpeg-turbo is covered by three
compatible BSD-style open source licenses. Refer to
LICENSE.txt for a roll-up of license terms.
libttspico ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE
License Version 2.
libtinyalsa ( )
tinyalsa: a small library to interface with ALSA in the
Linux kernel. The original download site for this
software is : No info. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the BSD.
libmtp (1.0.1)
libmtp The original download site for this software is :
http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/ . This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
the LGPL V2.
wpa_supplicant (0.8)
Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant
daemon. The original download site for this software
is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/ This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPLv2.
libmdnssd (320.10.80)
MDNS Responder. The mDNSResponder project is a
component of Bonjour, 5Apple's ease-of-use IP
networking initiative. The original download site for
this software is :
http://www.opensource.apple.com/tarballs/mDNSRe
sponder/ This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the Apache license
version 2
libz (1.2.8)
zlib compression library. The original download site
for this software is : http://zlib.net This piece of
112
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the BSD.
libffmpeg_av (2.1)
FFmpeg media player. The original download site for
this software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ This piece of
software is licensed under LGPL v2.1
iptables (1.4.20)
iptables is a user space application program that
allows a system administrator to configure the tables
provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as
different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it
stores. Different kernel modules and programs are
currently used for different protocols; iptables applies
to IPv4The original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPLv2.
libcurlmheg (7.21.6)
curl for MHEG. The original download site for this
software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ Curl and libcurl are
licensed under a MIT/X derivate license. Please look
at https://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.html
boringssl
(af0e32cb84f0c9cc65b9233a3414d2562642b342)
ssl for MHEG, Taken from android M. The original
download site for this software is :
https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/
Licensed under BSD, please find in /android/nbase/external/boringssl/NOTICE
toolbox (1.2.8)
The 'toolbox' command in Android is a multi-function
program. It encapsulates the functionality of many
common Linux commands (and some special Android
ones) into a single binary. This makes it more
compact than having all those other commands
installed individually. The original download site for
this software is : https://android.googlesource.com/
This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the Android APACHE License
Version 2.
libpng (1.6.22beta)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libpng-android This code
is released under the libpng license.
libssl
(7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31)
BoringSSL The original download site for this software
is : https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/
This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the BSD.
Hue SDK (1.8.1)
TV ambihue app uses Philips SDK to find the hue
bridge name. The original download site for this
software is :
https://developers.meethue.com/documentation/jav
a-multi-platform-and-android-sdk
libOpenMAXAL
(7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31)
OpenMAX AL is an application-level multimedia
playback and recording API for mobile embedded
devicesThe original download site for this software is :
https://www.khronos.org/openmax/ License free
Opera Web Browser (SDK 4.8.0)
This TV contains Opera Browser Software.
Third-party licenses
libOpenSLES (1.0)
WebKit
Khronos OpenSL Sound API spec. The original
download site for this software is :
https://www.khronos.org/opensles/ License free
libEGL libGLESv1_CM (3.1)
name
License
WebKit
URL:
http://webkit.org/
(WebKit doesn't distribute an explicit license. This
LICENSE is derived from license text in the source.)
Khronos OpenGL Graphics API spec. The original
download site for this software is :
https://www.opengl.org/ License free
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
113
2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Alexander Kellett,
Alexey Proskuryakov, Alex Mathews, Allan Sandfeld
Jensen, Alp Toker, Anders Carlsson, Andrew
Wellington, Antti Koivisto, Apple Inc., Arthur
Langereis, Baron Schwartz, Bjoern Graf, Brent
Fulgham, Cameron Zwarich, Charles Samuels,
Christian Dywan, Collabora Ltd., Cyrus Patel, Daniel
Molkentin, Dave Maclachlan, David Smith, Dawit
Alemayehu, Dirk Mueller, Dirk Schulze, Don Gibson,
Enrico Ros, Eric Seidel, Frederik Holljen, Frerich
Raabe, Friedmann Kleint, George Staikos, Google
Inc., Graham Dennis, Harri Porten, Henry
Mason, Hiroyuki Ikezoe, Holger Hans Peter Freyther,
IBM, James G. Speth, Jan Alonzo, Jean-Loup Gailly,
John Reis, Jonas Witt, Jon Shier, Jonas Witt, Julien
Chaffraix, Justin Haygood, Kevin Ollivier, Kevin
Watters, Kimmo Kinnunen, Kouhei Sutou, Krzysztof
Kowalczyk, Lars Knoll, Luca Bruno, Maks Orlovich,
Malte Starostik, Mark Adler, Martin Jones, Marvin
Decker, Matt Lilek, Michael Emmel, Mitz Pettel,
mozilla.org, Netscape Communications Corporation,
Nicholas Shanks, Nikolas Zimmermann, Nokia, Oliver
Hunt, Opened Hand, Paul Johnston, Peter Kelly,
Pioneer Research Center USA, Rich Moore, Rob Buis,
Robin Dunn, Ronald Tschalär, Samuel Weinig, Simon
Hausmann, Staikos Computing Services Inc., Stefan
Schimanski, Symantec Corporation, The
Dojo Foundation, The Karbon Developers, Thomas
Boyer, Tim Copperfield, Tobias Anton, Torben Weis,
Trolltech, University of Cambridge, Vaclav Slavik,
Waldo Bastian, Xan Lopez, Zack Rusin
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License,
applies to some specially designated Free Software
Foundation software, and to any other libraries
whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
The terms and conditions vary from file to file, but
are one of:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
*OR*
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link a program with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients so that they can relink them with the library,
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE
COMPUTER, INC. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER, INC.
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps:
(1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is
114
no warranty for this free library. If the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original version, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
this special one.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
companies distributing free software will individually
obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the
program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed
for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this
Library General Public License (also called "this
License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License,
which was designed for utility programs. This license,
the GNU Library General Public License, applies to
certain designated libraries. This license is quite
different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in
full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
as in the ordinary license.
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of
those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
The reason we have a separate public license for
some libraries is that they blur the distinction we
usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with
a library, without changing the library, is in some
sense simply using the library, and is analogous to
running a utility program or application program.
However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked
executable is a combined work, a derivative of the
original library, and the ordinary General Public
License treats it as such.
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associate interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary
General Public License for libraries did not effectively
promote software sharing, because most developers
did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker
conditions might promote sharing better.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program
using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent
of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs
would deprive the users of those programs of all
benefit from the free status of the libraries
themselves. This Library General Public License is
intended to permit developers of non-free programs
to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as
a user of such programs to change the free libraries
that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how
to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but
we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual
functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead
to faster development of free libraries.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Library's complete source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
of this License along with the
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a"work based on
the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while
the latter only works together with the library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by
the ordinary General Public License rather than by
115
warranty protection in exchange for a
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a
newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not
make any other change in these notices.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library
or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with
the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure
that, in the event an application does not supply
such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
squareroot function must still compute square roots.)
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is
called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus
to each and every part regardless of who
wrote. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim
rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library".
The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of
the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the
work can be linked without the Library, or if the work
is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is
not precisely defined by law.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary
GNU General Public License instead of this License
to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must
alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
116
work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section
6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may
also compile or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing
portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by
this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities
is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
You must give prominent notice with each copy of
the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License. You
must supply a copy of this License. If the
work during execution displays copyright notices,
you must include the copyright notice for the Library
among them, as well as a reference directing the user
to the copy of this License. Also, you must do
one of these things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whateve changes were used in
the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes
the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to
use the modified definitions.)
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since
you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Library or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based
on it.
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid
for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a
copy of these materials or that you have already sent
this user a copy.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is
117
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then
as a consequence you may not distribute the Library
at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all
those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
If the Library does not specify a license version
number, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into
other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to
ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section
has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which
is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder
who places the Library under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Library General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation.
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
118
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
END OF TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the library.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very
clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and
passed on, the recipients should know that what
they have is not the original version, so that the
original author's reputation will not be affected by
problems that might be introduced by others.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the
users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive
license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist
that any patent license obtained for a version of the
library must be consistent with the full freedom of
use specified in this license.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number
2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General
Public License, applies to certain designated libraries,
and is quite different from the ordinary General
Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into
non-free programs.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination
of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a
derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits
such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public
License permits more lax criteria for linking other code
with the library.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License.
It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for
many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use of
a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case
is that a free library does the same job as widely
used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library,
119
gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program
using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent
of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in
non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For
example, permission to use the GNU C Library in nonfree programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Library's complete source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
of this License along with the Library.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library
has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based
on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library
in order to run.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library
or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent noticesstating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
party saying it may be distributed under the terms
of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure
that, in the event an application does not supply
such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of
those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square
roots.)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
Activities other than copying, distribution and
120
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus
to each and every part regardless of who wrote
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library".
The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of
the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the
work can be linked without the Library, or if the work
is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is
not precisely defined by law.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary
GNU General Public License instead of this License
to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must
alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a
newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not
make any other change in these notices.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section
6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may
also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing
portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with
the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
these things:
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in
the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable "work that uses the Library", as object code
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes
the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to
use the modified definitions.)
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is
called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
121
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is
one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user's computer syste rather
than copying library functions into the executable,
and (2) will operate properly with a modified version
of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since
you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Library or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based
on it.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid
for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy
of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the
materials to be distributed need not include anything
that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then
as a consequence you may not distribute the Library
at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all
those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by
this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities
is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section
has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which
is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
122
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder
who places the Library under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library does not specify a license version
number, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into
other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to
ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
END OF TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
Other
name
License
Chromium
URL:
http://www.chromium.org
Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
NO WARRANTY
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
123
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
Fontconfig
URL: http://www.fontconfig.org
this software without specific prior written permission.
Copyright © 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007
Keith Packard
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
Copyright © 2005 Patrick Lam
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
Copyright © 2009 Roozbeh Pournader
Copyright © 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc.
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
Copyright © 2008 Danilo Šegan
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell
this software and its
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
documentation, and that the name of the author(s)
not be used in
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of
the software without
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
specific, written prior permission. The authors make
no
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
representations about the suitability of this software
for any purpose. It
is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
--
The following files are distributed under the MPL
1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license:
THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
chromium-nss.h
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
chromium-blapi.h
chromium-blapit.h
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
chromium-sha256.h
chromium-prtypes.h
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
The following files contain portions distributed under
the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license:
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom
ain.cc
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom
ain.h
Arphic fonts
The following files are distributed under the MPL 2.0
license:
URL:
http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/CJKUnifo
124
nts/Download
b) You must make such modifications Freely
Available as a whole to all third parties under the
terms of this License, such as by offering access to
copy the modifications from a designated place, or
distributing the modifications on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1999 Arphic Technology Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved except as specified below.
c) If the modified fonts normally reads
commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the
most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else,
saying that you provide a warranty) and that users
may redistribute the Font under these conditions, and
telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
forbidden.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE specifically
permits and encourages you to use this software,
provided that you give the recipients all the rights that
we gave you and make sure they can get the
modifications of this software.
These requirements apply to the modified work
as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Font, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. Therefore, mere aggregation of
another work not based on the Font with the Font on
a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
Legal Terms
Throughout this License, "Font" means the
TrueType fonts "AR PL Mingti2L Big5", "AR PL KaitiM
Big5" (BIG-5 character set) and "AR PL SungtiL GB",
"AR PL KaitiM GB" (GB character set) which are
originally distributed by Arphic, and the derivatives of
those fonts created through any modification
including modifying glyph, reordering glyph,
converting format, changing font name, or
adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or
distribute the Font except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Font will
automatically retroactively void your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received copies
or rights from you under this License will keep their
licenses valid so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
"PL" means "Public License".
"Copyright Holder" means whoever is named in
the copyright or copyrights for the Font.
You are not required to accept this License, since
you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
you permission to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Font. These actions are prohibited by
law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
copying, modifying, sublicensing or distributing the
Font, you indicate your acceptance of this License
and all its terms and conditions.
"You" means the licensee, or person copying,
redistributing or modifying the Font.
"Freely Available" means that you have the
freedom to copy or modify the Font as well as
redistribute copies of the Font under the same
conditions you received, not price. If you wish, you
can charge for this service.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this Font in any medium, without restriction, provided
that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT)
unaltered in all copies.
Each time you redistribute the Font, the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Font subject
to these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
You may otherwise modify your copy of this Font
in any way, including modifying glyph, reordering
glyph, converting format, changing font name, or
adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table,
and copy and distribute such modifications under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that the following
conditions are met:
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
a) You must insert a prominent notice in each
modified file stating how and when you changed that
file.
125
simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Font at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Font by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you,
then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Font.
Copyright
=========
Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. Bitstream
Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of the fonts accompanying this license
("Fonts") and associated
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
documentation files (the "Font Software"), to
reproduce and distribute
the Font Software, including without limitation the
rights to use,
BECAUSE THE FONT IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE FONT,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE FONT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
FONT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE FONT PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of
the Font
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font
Software is furnished
to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright and trademark notices and this
permission notice
shall be included in all copies of one or more of the
Font Software
The Font Software may be modified, altered, or
added to, and in
UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING, IN NO EVENT WILL ANY
COPYRIGHTT HOLDERS, OR OTHER PARTIES WHO
MAY COPY, MODIFY OR REDISTRIBUTE THE FONT
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDERS OR
OTHER PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the
Fonts may be
modified and additional glyphs or characters may be
added to the
Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not
containing either
the words "Bitstream" or the word "Vera".
This License becomes null and void to the extent
applicable to Fonts
or Font Software that has been modified and is
distributed under the
"Bitstream Vera" names.
Bitstream Vera fonts
The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger
software package but
URL:
http://www.gnome.org/fonts/#Final_Bitstream_Vera
_Fonts
no copy of one or more of the Font Software
typefaces may be sold by itself.
Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright
The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing
derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are
not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as
they are not *sold* by themselves). They can be be
bundled, redistributed and sold with any software.
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
The fonts are distributed under the following
copyright:
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER
126
RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
See 1. above.
BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
3. Are derivative works allowed?
OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
Yes!
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
4. Can I change or add to the font(s)?
Yes, but you must change the name(s) of the
font(s).
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE FONT
SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
FONT SOFTWARE.
5. Under what terms are derivative works allowed?
You must change the name(s) of the fonts.
This is to ensure the
Except as contained in this notice, the names of
Gnome, the Gnome
quality of the fonts, both to protect Bitstream
and Gnome. We want to
Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in
advertising or
ensure that if an application has opened a
font specifically of these
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
in this Font
names, it gets what it expects (though of
course, using fontconfig,
Software without prior written authorization from the
Gnome Foundation
substitutions could still could have occurred
during font
or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information,
contact:
opening). You must include the Bitstream
copyright. Additional
fonts at gnome dot org.
copyrights can be added, as per copyright law.
Happy Font Hacking!
Copyright FAQ
=============
6. If I have improvements for Bitstream Vera, is it
possible they might get
1. I don't understand the resale restriction... What
gives?
adopted in future versions?
Bitstream is giving away these fonts, but
wishes to ensure its
Yes. The contract between the Gnome
Foundation and Bitstream has
competitors can't just drop the fonts as is into
a font sale system
provisions for working with Bitstream to ensure
quality additions to
and sell them as is. It seems fair that if
Bitstream can't make money
the Bitstream Vera font family. Please contact
us if you have such
from the Bitstream Vera fonts, their
competitors should not be able to
additions. Note, that in general, we will want
such additions for the
do so either. You can sell the fonts as part of
any software package,
entire family, not just a single font, and that
you'll have to keep
however.
both Gnome and Jim Lyles, Vera's designer,
happy! To make sense to add
2. I want to package these fonts separately for
distribution and
glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in
keeping with Vera's
sale as part of a larger software package or
system. Can I do so?
design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note"
font. Jim Lyles will be
Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger
software package" to begin
providing a document describing the design
elements used in Vera, as a
with, and you aren't selling them
independently by themselves.
guide and aid for people interested in
127
contributing to Vera.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions
for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
7. I want to sell a software package that uses these
fonts: Can I do so?
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or
entity authorized by
Sure. Bundle the fonts with your software and
sell your software
the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
with the fonts. That is the intent of the
copyright.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the
acting entity and all
8. If applications have built the names "Bitstream
Vera" into them,
other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common
can I override this somehow to use fonts of my
choosing?
control with that entity. For the purposes of
this definition,
This depends on exact details of the software.
Most open source
"control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the
systems and software (e.g., Gnome, KDE, etc.)
are now converting to
direction or management of such entity,
whether by contract or
use fontconfig (see www.fontconfig.org) to
handle font configuration,
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the
selection and substitution; it has provisions for
overriding font
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
names and subsituting alternatives. An
example is provided by the
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or
Legal Entity
supplied local.conf file, which chooses the
family Bitstream Vera for
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form
for making modifications,
"sans", "serif" and "monospace". Other
software (e.g., the XFree86
including but not limited to software source
code, documentation
core server) has other mechanisms for font
substitution.
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting
from mechanical
Open Sans fonts
URL:
http://www.google.com/fonts/specimen/Open+Sans
transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but
not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation,
License for Open Sans Font Family
and conversions to other media types.
--------------------------------
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship,
whether in Source or
Apache License
Version 2.0,
January 2004
Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
copyright notice that is included in or attached
to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work,
whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the
1. Definitions.
128
Work and for which the
copyright license to reproduce, prepare
Derivative Works of,
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations,
or other modifications
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense,
and distribute the
represent, as a whole, an original work of
authorship. For the purposes
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form.
of this License, Derivative Works shall not
include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by
name) to the interfaces of,
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
"Contribution" shall mean any work of
authorship, including
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable
the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions
(except as stated in this section) patent license
to make, have made,
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work,
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner
where such license applies only to those
patent claims licensable
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of
by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this
definition, "submitted"
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of
their Contribution(s)
means any form of electronic, verbal, or
written communication sent
with the Work to which such Contribution(s)
was submitted. If You
to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to
institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a
communication on electronic mailing lists,
source code control systems,
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work
and issue tracking systems that are managed
by, or on behalf of, the
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but
or contributory patent infringement, then any
patent licenses
excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise
granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate
designated in writing by the copyright owner
as "Not a Contribution."
as of the date such litigation is filed.
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and
distribute copies of the
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
modifications, and in Source or Object form,
provided that You
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
meet the following conditions:
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
(a) You must give any other recipients of the
Work or
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royaltyfree, irrevocable
Derivative Works a copy of this License;
129
and
terms and conditions
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your
modifications, or
stating that You changed the files; and
for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use,
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works
reproduction, and distribution of the Work
otherwise complies with
that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and
the conditions stated in this License.
attribution notices from the Source form
of the Work,
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You
explicitly state otherwise,
excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of
any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as
part of its
by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of
distribution, then any Derivative Works
that You distribute must
this License, without any additional terms or
conditions.
include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein
shall supersede or modify
within such NOTICE file, excluding those
notices that do not
the terms of any separate license agreement
you may have executed
pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works, in at least one
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
of the following places: within a NOTICE
text file distributed
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant
permission to use the trade
as part of the Derivative Works; within
the Source form or
names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor,
documentation, if provided along with
the Derivative Works; or,
except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the
within a display generated by the
Derivative Works, if and
origin of the Work and reproducing the
content of the NOTICE file.
wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by
applicable law or
of the NOTICE file are for informational
purposes only and
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each
do not modify the License. You may add
Your own attribution
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text
from the Work, provided
implied, including, without limitation, any
warranties or conditions
that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
as modifying the License.
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the
You may add Your own copyright statement to
Your modifications and
appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any
may provide additional or different license
130
risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to
your work.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no
legal theory,
To apply the Apache License to your work,
attach the following
whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise,
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]"
unless required by applicable law (such as
deliberate and grossly
replaced with your own identifying
information. (Don't include
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall
any Contributor be
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in
the appropriate
liable to You for damages, including any
direct, indirect, special,
comment syntax for the file format. We also
recommend that a
incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a
file or class name and description of purpose
be included on the
result of this License or out of the use or
inability to use the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice
for easier
Work (including but not limited to damages for
loss of goodwill,
identification within third-party archives.
work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0
(the "License");
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While
redistributing
You may obtain a copy of the License at
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may
choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity,
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
License. However, in accepting such
obligations, You may act only
distributed under the License is distributed on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
on Your own behalf and on Your sole
responsibility, not on behalf
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree
to indemnify,
See the License for the specific language
governing permissions and
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless
for any liability
limitations under the License.
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason
VL Gothic fonts
URL: http://dicey.org/vlgothic/index.html
of your accepting any such warranty or
additional liability.
License for VLGothic Font Family
--------------------------------
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
This font includes glyphs derived from M+ FONTS
131
which is created by
M+ FONTS PROJECT. License for M+ FONTS part is
described in M+ FONTS
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WADA
LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO AND
PROJECT's license. See attached 'LICENSE_E.mplus'.
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
This font also includes glyphs derived from
Sazanami Gothic font which
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory
(/efont/). License for
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR
Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See
attached
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
'README.sazanami' for original Sazanami Gothic font
license.
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
This font also includes original glyphs which is
created by Daisuke
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
SUZUKI and Project Vine based on M+ FONTS. Licese
for VL Gothic
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
original glyphs is same as M+ FONTS PROJECT's
license.
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
There is no limitation and the below description is
not applied
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
as for in order not to reuse as font (ex: font is
embeded to documents).
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 1990-2003 Wada Laboratory, the
University of Tokyo.
Nanum fonts
URL: http://hangeul.naver.com/
Copyright (c) 2003-2004 Electronic Font Open
Laboratory (/efont/).
Copyright (c) 2010, NAVER Corporation
(http://www.nhncorp.com),
Copyright (C) 2003-2009 M+ FONTS PROJECT
with Reserved Font Name Nanum, Naver Nanum,
NanumGothic, Naver NanumGothic,
NanumMyeongjo, Naver NanumMyeongjo,
NanumBrush, Naver NanumBrush, NanumPen, Naver
NanumPen, Naver NanumGothicEco,
NanumGothicEco, Naver NanumMyeongjoEco,
NanumMyeongjoEco, Naver NanumGothicLight,
NanumGothicLight, NanumBarunGothic, Naver
NanumBarunGothic,
Copyright (C) 2006-2009 Daisuke SUZUKI
.
Copyright (C) 2006-2009 Project Vine
.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open
Font License, Version 1.1.
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
This license is copied below, and is also available with
a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
are met:
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open
Font License, Version 1.1.
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation
This license is copied below, and is also available with
a FAQ at:
and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products
----------------------------------------------------------
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February
132
2007
in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
----------------------------------------------------------
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software
may be bundled,
PREAMBLE
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided
that each copy
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to
stimulate worldwide development of collaborative
font projects, to support the font creation efforts of
academic and linguistic communities, and to provide
a free and open framework in which fonts may be
shared and improved in partnership with others.
contains the above copyright notice and this license.
These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, humanreadable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields
within text or
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used,
studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as
they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including
any derivative works, can be bundled,
embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any
software provided that any reserved names are not
used by derivative works. The fonts and
derivatives, however, cannot be released under any
other type of license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any
document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
binary files as long as those fields can be easily
viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use
the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted
by the corresponding
Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by
the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly
marked as such. This may include source files, build
scripts and documentation.
presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the
Author(s) of the Font
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified
as such after the copyright statement(s).
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or
advertise any
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font
Software components as distributed by the
Copyright Holder(s).
Modified Version, except to acknowledge the
contribution(s) of the
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by
adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in
whole -- any of the components of the Original
Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font
Software to a new environment.
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their
explicit written
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part
or in whole,
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer,
programmer, technical writer or other person who
contributed to the Font Software.
must be distributed entirely under this license, and
must not be
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
distributed under any other license. The requirement
for fonts to
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
remain under this license does not apply to any
document created
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy,
merge, embed, modify,
using the Font Software.
redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies
of the Font
TERMINATION
Software, subject to the following conditions:
This license becomes null and void if any of the
above conditions are
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual
components,
not met.
133
DISCLAIMER
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
This license, the Library General Public License,
applies to some specially designated Free Software
Foundation software, and to any other libraries
whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER
RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link a program with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients so that they can relink them with the library,
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
Mini-XML
URL: http://www.msweet.org/projects.php?Z3
Mini-XML License
The Mini-XML library and included programs are
provided under the terms of the GNU Library General
Public License version 2 (LGPL2) with the following
exceptions:
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps:
(1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
If you link the application to a modified version of
Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be
provided under the terms of the LGPL2 in sections 1,
2, and 4.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free library. If the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original version, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
companies distributing free software will individually
obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the
program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed
for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It
is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the
ordinary GPL.]
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License,
which was designed for utility programs. This license,
the GNU Library General Public License, applies to
certain designated libraries. This license is quite
different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
134
full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
as in the ordinary license.
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
The reason we have a separate public license for
some libraries is that they blur the distinction we
usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with a
library, without changing the library, is in some sense
simply using the library, and is analogous to running a
utility program or application program. However, in a
textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a
combined work, a derivative of the original library,
and the ordinary General Public License treats it as
such.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using
the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary
General Public License for libraries did not effectively
promote software sharing, because most developers
did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker
conditions might promote sharing better.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs
would deprive the users of those programs of all
benefit from the free status of the libraries
themselves. This Library General Public License is
intended to permit developers of non-free programs
to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as
a user of such programs to change the free libraries
that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how
to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but
we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual
functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead
to faster development of free libraries.
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on
the libary" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while
the latter only works together with the library.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely welldefined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by
the ordinary General Public License rather than by
this special one.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".)
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
135
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the
same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of
the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
136
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
Lesser General Public License for more details.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest
in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs)
written by James Random Hacker.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President
of Vice
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by
electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
That's all there is to it!
Boost
URL: http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th,
2003
NO WARRANTY
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person or organization
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of
the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone
can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce,
display, distribute,
execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare
derivative works of the
Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the
Software is furnished to
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to
the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at
least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the
full notice is found.
do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire
statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer,
one line to give the library's name and an idea of
what it does.
must be included in all copies of the Software, in
whole or in part, and
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it
and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser
General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License,
or (at your option) any later version.
all derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative
works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by
a source language processor.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
137
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
.c
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
/* GSSAPI/krb5 support for FTP - loosely based on
old krb4.c
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
*
* Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2013
Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
* (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm,
Sweden).
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
* Copyright (c) 2004 - 2012 Daniel Stenberg
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
* All rights reserved.
*
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
libcurl
URL: http://curl.haxx.se/
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
* are met:
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2014, Daniel Stenberg,
.
*
All rights reserved.
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any purpose
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright
*
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
*
* 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names
of its contributors
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
* may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
*
without specific prior written permission.
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
*
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
in this Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
libcurl - lib/krb5.c
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
URL:
https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/krb5
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
138
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
*
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
* SUCH DAMAGE. */
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
libcurl - lib/security.c
*
URL:
https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/secu
rity.c
* 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names
of its contributors
/* This source code was modified by Martin
Hedenfalk for
*
* may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
*
* use in Curl. His latest changes were done
2000-09-18.
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
*
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* It has since been patched and modified a lot by
Daniel Stenberg
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* to make it better applied to curl
conditions, and to make
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* it not use globals, pollute name space and more.
This source code awaits a
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* rewrite to work around the paragraph 2 in the BSD
licenses as explained
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* below.
*
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska
Högskolan
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm,
Sweden).
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
*
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* Copyright (C) 2001 - 2013, Daniel Stenberg,
, et al.
* SUCH DAMAGE. */
*
* All rights reserved.
David M. Gay's floating point routines
*
URL: http://www.netlib.org/fp/
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
/*********************************************************
*******
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
*
* are met:
* The author of this software is David M. Gay.
*
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
* Copyright (c) 1991, 2000, 2001 by Lucent
139
Technologies.
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
*
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided
that this entire notice
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* is included in all copies of any software which is or
includes a copy
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* or modification of this software and in all copies of
the supporting
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* documentation for such software.
*
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE
AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
********************************************************
*******/
*
* --* Author: Kostya Serebryany
dynamic annotations
*/
URL: http://code.google.com/p/data-racetest/wiki/DynamicAnnotations
libevent
/* Copyright (c) 2008-2009, Google Inc.
URL: http://libevent.org/
* All rights reserved.
*
Libevent is available for use under the following
license, commonly known
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license:
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
==============================
* met:
Copyright (c) 2000-2007 Niels Provos
*
Copyright (c) 2007-2010 Niels Provos and Nick
Mathewson
* * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
are met:
* this software without specific prior written
permission.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following
140
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR)
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
URL: http://www.mozilla.org/projects/nspr/
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
*
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
* License.
*
*
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* The Original Code is the Netscape Portable
Runtime (NSPR).
==============================
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
Portions of Libevent are based on works by others,
also made available by
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
them under the three-clause BSD license above.
The copyright notices are
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1998-2000
available in the corresponding source files; the license
is as above. Here's
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
a list:
* Contributor(s):
*
*
Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of
California.
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
Copyright (c) 2003 Michael A. Davis
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
Copyright (c) 2007 Sun Microsystems
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
Copyright (c) 2006 Maxim Yegorushkin
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
Copyright 2002 Niels Provos
141
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
google-glog's symbolization library
URL: https://github.com/google/glog
Paul Hsieh's SuperFastHash
Copyright (c) 2006, Google Inc.
URL:
http://www.azillionmonkeys.com/qed/hash.html
All rights reserved.
Paul Hsieh OLD BSD license
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Copyright (c) 2010, Paul Hsieh
All rights reserved.
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification,
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of
its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
other materials provided with the distribution.
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* Neither my name, Paul Hsieh, nor the names of any
other contributors to the
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
code use may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
software without specific prior written permission.
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
142
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
valgrind
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
URL: http://valgrind.org
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
Notice that the following BSD-style license applies
to the Valgrind header
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
files used by Chromium (valgrind.h and
memcheck.h). However, the rest of
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
Valgrind is licensed under the terms of the GNU
General Public License,
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
version 2, unless otherwise indicated.
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
---------------------------------------------------------------
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Julian Seward. All
rights reserved.
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
Mozilla Personal Security Manager
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozillacentral/source/security/manager/
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
2. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
documentation would be appreciated but is
not required.
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
*
3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
not be misrepresented as being the original
software.
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
4. The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
products derived from this software without
specific prior written
* License.
permission.
*
143
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
*
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
*
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 2000
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* Contributor(s):
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
*
* License.
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
*
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1994-2000
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* Contributor(s):
*
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
*
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
Network Security Services (NSS)
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
URL:
http://www.mozilla.org/projects/security/pki/nss/
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
*
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
144
boringssl
open-vcdiff
URL: https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl
URL: https://github.com/google/open-vcdiff
LICENSE ISSUES
Almost Native Graphics Layer Engine
==============
URL: http://code.google.com/p/angleproject/
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e.
both the conditions of
Copyright (C) 2002-2013 The ANGLE Project Authors.
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay
license apply to the toolkit.
All rights reserved.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both
licenses are BSD-style
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ==============================================
======================
Neither the name of TransGaming Inc., Google Inc.,
3DLabs Inc. Ltd., nor the names of their contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
*
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
* are met:
*
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
*
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
*
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this
distribution.
*
* software must display the following
acknowledgment:
145
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
* ==============================================
======================
*
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL
Project" must not be used to
* This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young
* endorse or promote products derived from this
software without
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes
software written by Tim
* prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
*
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*/
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be
called "OpenSSL"
Original SSLeay License
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names
without prior written
-----------------------
*
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must
retain the following
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
*
acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
*
* This library is free for commercial and noncommercial use as long as
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* the following conditions are aheared to. The
following conditions
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA,
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
*
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any
Copyright notices in
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* the code are not to be removed.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at
program startup or
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
146
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with
the package.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
*
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* SUCH DAMAGE.
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright
* The licence and distribution terms for any
publically available version or
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
*/
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Brotli
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software
URL: https://github.com/google/brotli
*
Google Cache Invalidation API
must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software
written by
*
URL:
https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromium/src/+
/master/third_party/cacheinvalidation/README.chro
mium
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the
rouines from the library
*
Crashpad
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a
derivative thereof) from
URL: https://crashpad.chromium.org/
* the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
drawElements Quality Program
* "This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
URL:
https://source.android.com/devices/graphics/testing.
html
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG
``AS IS'' AND
dom-distiller-js
URL: https://github.com/chromium/dom-distiller
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
met:
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
147
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
third_party/gwt_exporter
Copyright 2007 Timepedia.org
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
third_party/gwt-2.5.1
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
Copyright 2008 Google
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
java/org/chromium/distiller/dev
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
Copyright 2008 Google
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
Apache License
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
Version 2.0, January 2004
this software without specific prior written permission.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity
authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting
entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For
the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or
more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal
Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
Parts of the following directories are available under
Apache v2.0
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for
making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
src/de
Copyright (c) 2009-2011 Christian Kohlschütter
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from
mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
148
form, including but not limited to compiled object
code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any
part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not
modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in
Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is
included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in
Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship.
For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or
merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or
distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship,
including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative
Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright
owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any
form of electronic, verbal, or written communication
sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to communication on electronic
mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue
tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf
of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but excluding communication
that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated
in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Expat XML Parser
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/expat/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd
and Clark
Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers.
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual
or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently
incorporated within the Work.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that You changed the files; and
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative
Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source
form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
the following conditions:
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to
149
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
fips181
URL: http://www.adel.nursat.kz/apg/
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
flac
Adel I. Mirzazhanov. All rights reserved
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/flac/files/flacsrc/flac-1.2.1-src/flac-1.2.1.tar.gz/download
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
Copyright (C)
2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007 Josh
Coalson
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
1.Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
are met:
2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3.The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote products
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR
150
International
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor
the names of its
Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson
Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
Copyright © 2005 David Turner
this software without specific prior written permission.
Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat,
Inc.
Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner
Lemberg
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
For full copyright notices consult the individual files in
the package.
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
Permission is hereby granted, without written
agreement and without
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
software and its documentation for any purpose,
provided that the
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
above copyright notice and the following two
paragraphs appear in
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
all copies of this software.
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND
ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN
IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
harfbuzz-ng
URL: http://harfbuzz.org
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT"
license. Details follow.
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
For parts of HarfBuzz that are licensed under different
licenses see individual
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS
files names COPYING in subdirectories where
applicable.
ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
HAS NO OBLIGATION TO
Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES,
ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation
Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited
Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its
subsidiary(-ies)
iccjpeg
URL: http://www.ijg.org
Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley
Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL
151
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied,
This software may be referred to only as "the
Independent JPEG Group's
with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy,
merchantability, or
software".
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you,
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of
its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and
accuracy.
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are
assumed by the product vendor.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
icu
URL: http://site.icu-project.org/
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these
conditions:
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this
Copyright (c) 1995-2014 International Business
Machines Corporation and
README file must be included, with this copyright
and no-warranty notice
others
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to
the original files
All rights reserved.
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a
documentation must state that "this software is based
in part on the work of
copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
the Independent JPEG Group".
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only
if the user accepts
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
full responsibility for any undesirable consequences;
the authors accept
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
to permit persons to
NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided
that the above
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on the IJG code,
copyright notice(s) and this permission notice
appear in all copies of
not just to the unmodified library. If you use our
work, you ought to
the Software and that both the above copyright
notice(s) and this
acknowledge us.
permission notice appear in supporting
documentation.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
in advertising or publicity relating to this software or
products derived from it.
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
152
THE WARRANTIES OF
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated
documentation
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT
(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
(the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use,
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell
copies of
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Data Files
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall
or Software are furnished to do so, provided that
(a) this copyright and permission notice appear with
all copies
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or
of the Data Files or Software,
other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization of
(b) this copyright and permission notice appear in
associated
the copyright holder.
documentation, and
________________________________________
___________________________
(c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or
in the Software
as well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or
All trademarks and registered trademarks
mentioned herein are the
Software that the data or software has been modified.
property of their respective owners.
________________________________________
___________________________
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE
Third-Party Software Licenses
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
This section contains third-party software notices
and/or additional
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
terms for licensed third-party software
components included within ICU
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
libraries.
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
1. Unicode Data Files and Software
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
Copyright © 1991-2014 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved.
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
153
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder
IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale,
ECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDIN
use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software
without prior
G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
written authorization of the copyright holder.
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L
IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data
(cjdict.txt)
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O
# The Google Chrome software developed by
Google is licensed under the BSD li
F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
#
ses, as set forth below.
#
#
#
#
The word list in cjdict.txt are generated by
combining three word lists l
The BSD License
#
http://opensource.org/licenses/bsd-license.php
isted
#
#
below with further processing for
compound word breaking. The frequency i
Copyright (C) 2006-2008, Google Inc.
#
#
s generated
All rights reserved.
#
with an iterative training against Google
web corpora.
#
#
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modifi
#
#
cation, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
* Libtabe (Chinese)
#
https://sourceforge.net/project/?group_id=1519
#
#
- Its license terms and conditions are
shown below.
#
Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, th
#
is list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
#
#
Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
* IPADIC (Japanese)
#
http://chasen.aistnara.ac.jp/chasen/distribution.html
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or
#
- Its license terms and conditions are
shown below.
other materials provided with the distribution.
#
#
Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be
#
---------COPYING.libtabe ---BEGIN--------------------
used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific
#
prior written permission.
#
#
#
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I
S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL
#
/*
#
* Copyrighy (c) 1999 TaBE Project.
#
* Copyright (c) 1999 Pai-Hsiang Hsiao.
#
* All rights reserved.
#
*
#
* Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
154
#
* modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions
#
* are met:
#
*
#
/*
#
* Copyright (c) 1999 Computer Systems
and Communication Lab,
#
*
Institute of
Information Science, Academia Sinica.
#
* . Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright
#
* notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
#
* All rights reserved.
#
*
#
* Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
#
* . Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright
#
* modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions
#
* notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in
#
* are met:
#
* the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
#
*
#
#
* . Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright
* distribution.
#
* . Neither the name of the TaBE Project
nor the names of its
#
* notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
#
* contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived
#
* . Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright
#
* from this software without specific
prior written permission.
#
#
* notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in
*
#
* the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
#
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
#
#
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
#
* . Neither the name of the Computer
Systems and Communication Lab
#
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
#
* nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or
#
* FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
#
* promote products derived from this
software without specific
#
* REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
#
* INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
#
* prior written permission.
#
*
#
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
#
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
#
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
#
* SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
#
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
#
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
#
* FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
#
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
#
* REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
#
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
#
* INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
#
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
#
* distribution.
#
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
*/
#
* SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
#
155
#
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
#
action of contract, negligence or other
tortuous action, arising out
#
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
#
of or in connection with the use or
performance of this software.
#
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
#
#
#
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
#
A large portion of the dictionary entries
#
originate from ICOT Free Software. The
following conditions for ICOT
*/
#
Free Software applies to the current
dictionary as well.
#
#
Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Tsai @ Beckman
Institute, University of Illinois
#
#
Each User may also freely distribute the
Program, whether in its
#
c-tsai4@uiuc.edu
http://casper.beckman.uiuc.edu/~c-tsai4
#
#
original form or modified, to any third party
or parties, PROVIDED
#
---------------COPYING.libtabe-----END
-----------------------------------
#
that the provisions of Section 3 ("NO
WARRANTY") will ALWAYS appear
-
#
on, or be attached to, the Program, which is
distributed substantially
#
#
in the same form as set out herein and that
such intended
#
#
---------------COPYING.ipadic-----BEGI
N----------------------------------
#
distribution, if actually made, will neither
violate or otherwise
-#
#
contravene any of the laws and regulations
of the countries having
#
Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Nara
Institute of Science
#
jurisdiction over the User or the intended
distribution itself.
#
#
and Technology. All Rights Reserved.
#
#
#
Use, reproduction, and distribution of this
software is permitted.
#
#
The program was produced on an
experimental basis in the course of the
#
Any copy of this software, whether in its
original form or modified,
#
research and development conducted
during the project and is provided
#
must include both the above copyright
notice and the following
#
#
to users as so produced on an
experimental basis. Accordingly, the
paragraphs.
#
#
program is provided without any warranty
whatsoever, whether express,
#
Nara Institute of Science and Technology
(NAIST),
#
implied, statutory or otherwise. The term
"warranty" used herein
#
the copyright holders, disclaims all
warranties with regard to this
#
includes, but is not limited to, any warranty
of the quality,
#
software, including all implied warranties of
merchantability and
#
NO WARRANTY
#
performance, merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose of
fitness, in no event shall NAIST be liable for
#
any special, indirect or consequential
damages or any damages
#
the program and the nonexistence of any
infringement or violation of
#
whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an
#
#
156
any right of any third party.
#
Each user of the program will agree and
understand, and be deemed to
#
writing, such person, organization or entity,
will also be exempted
#
have agreed and understood, that there is
no warranty whatsoever for
#
from and not be held liable to the user for
any such damages as noted
#
the program and, accordingly, the entire
risk arising from or
#
above as far as the program is concerned.
#
#
otherwise connected with the program is
assumed by the user.
#
---------------COPYING.ipadic-----END-----------------------------------
#
#
Therefore, neither ICOT, the copyright
holder, or any other
3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt)
#
organization that participated in or was
otherwise related to the
Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines
Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved.
#
development of the program and their
respective officials, directors,
Project:
http://code.google.com/p/laodictionary/
#
officers and other employees shall be held
liable for any and all
Dictionary: http://laodictionary.googlecode.com/git/Lao-Dictionary.txt
#
damages, including, without limitation,
general, special, incidental
License:
http://lao-dictionary.googlecode.com/git/LaoDictionary-LICEN
#
and consequential damages, arising out of
or otherwise in connection
(copied below)
#
with the use or inability to use the program
or any product, material
This file is derived from the above dictionary, with
slight modifications.
#
or result produced or otherwise obtained
by using the program,
------------------------------------------------------------------------
#
regardless of whether they have been
advised of, or otherwise had
#
knowledge of, the possibility of such
damages at any time during the
Copyright (C) 2013 Brian Eugene Wilson, Robert
Martin Campbell.
#
project or thereafter. Each user will be
deemed to have agreed to the
All rights reserved.
#
foregoing by his or her commencement of
use of the program. The term
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
#
"use" as used herein includes, but is not
limited to, the use,
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright no
#
modification, copying and distribution of
the program and the
tice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions
#
production of secondary products from the
program.
in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of cond
#
itions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materi
#
In the case where the program, whether in
its original form or
als provided with the distribution.
#
modified, was distributed or delivered to or
received by a user from
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
#
any person, organization or entity other
than ICOT, unless it makes or
#
grants independently of ICOT any specific
warranty to the user in
157
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP
LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA
ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data
(burmesedict.txt)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Copyright (c) 2014 International Business Machines
Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved.
5. Time Zone Database
This list is part of a project hosted at:
github.com/kanyawtech/myanmar-karen-word-lists
ICU uses the public domain data and code derived
from Time Zone Database
------------------------------------------------------------------------
for its time zone support. The ownership of the TZ
database is explained
Copyright (c) 2013, LeRoy Benjamin Sharon
in BCP 175: Procedure for Maintaining the Time
Zone Database section 7.
All rights reserved.
1 - Database Ownership
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modifi
cation, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
The TZ database itself is not an IETF Contribution
or an IETF
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice,
document. Rather it is a pre-existing and
regularly updated work
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
that is in the public domain, and is intended to
remain in the public
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notic
domain. Therefore, BCPs 78 [RFC5378] and 79
[RFC3979] do not apply
e, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation an
to the TZ Database or contributions that
individuals make to it.
d/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Should any claims be made and substantiated
against the TZ Database,
Neither the name Myanmar Karen Word Lists, nor
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
the organization that is providing the IANA
Considerations defined in
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I
this RFC, under the memorandum of
understanding with the IETF,
158
currently ICANN, may act in accordance with all
competent court
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
orders. No ownership claims will be made by
ICANN or the IETF Trust
MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE MATERIALS.
on the database or the code. Any person making
a contribution to the
database or code waives all rights to future claims
in that
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept.
18, 2008)
contribution or in the TZ Database.
Copyright (C) 1992 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
google-jstemplate
URL: http://code.google.com/p/google-jstemplate/
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of
Khronos header files
this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in
URL: http://www.khronos.org/registry
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to
Copyright (c) 2007-2010 The Khronos Group Inc.
use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do
copy of this software and/or associated
documentation files (the
so, subject to the following conditions:
"Materials"), to deal in the Materials without
restriction, including
The above copyright notice including the dates of first
publication and either
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
this permission notice or a reference to
http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Materials, and to
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions
of the Software.
permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished
to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON
THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon
Graphics, Inc. shall
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other
159
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
Graphics, Inc.
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
LevelDB: A Fast Persistent Key-Value Store
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
URL: https://github.com/google/leveldb.git
Copyright (c) 2011 The LevelDB Authors. All rights
reserved.
The library to input, validate, and display
addresses.
URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/libaddressinput
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
libjingle
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
URL: http://www.webrtc.org
met:
libjpeg
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
URL: http://www.ijg.org/
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied,
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy,
merchantability, or
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you,
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and
accuracy.
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
conditions:
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
README file must be included, with this copyright
and no-warranty notice
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to
the original files
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
160
documentation.
produced with GNU Autoconf.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying
It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is
freely distributable.
documentation must state that "this software is based
in part on the work of
The same holds for its supporting scripts
(config.guess, config.sub,
the Independent JPEG Group".
ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh,
is copyright
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only
if the user accepts
by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
full responsibility for any undesirable consequences;
the authors accept
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the
JPEG spec is covered by
NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence
arithmetic coding cannot
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on the IJG code,
legally be used without obtaining one or more
licenses. For this reason,
not just to the unmodified library. If you use our
work, you ought to
support for arithmetic coding has been removed from
the free JPEG software.
acknowledge us.
(Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain
over the unpatented
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name
Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many
implementations will support it.)
in advertising or publicity relating to this software or
products derived from it.
So far as we are aware, there are no patent
restrictions on the remaining
This software may be referred to only as "the
Independent JPEG Group's
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read
and write GIF files.
software".
To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent,
GIF reading support has
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of
been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has
been simplified to produce
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are
"uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use
the LZW algorithm; the
assumed by the product vendor.
resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are
readable by all standard
sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin
Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.
GIF decoders.
by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software
Foundation; principally,
We are required to state that
"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the
Copyright property of
that you must include source code if you redistribute
it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for
CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service
Mark property of
full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part
CompuServe Incorporated."
of any program generated from the IJG code, this
does not limit you more than
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script "configure" was
161
Public License.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
libjpeg-turbo
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/libjpeg-turbo/
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
libjpeg-turbo is licensed under a non-restrictive, BSDstyle license
International Phone Number Library
(see README.) The TurboJPEG/OSS wrapper (both
C and Java versions) and
URL:
http://libphonenumber.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/
associated test programs bear a similar license, which
is reproduced below:
Copyright (C) 2011 Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
"License");
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
you may not use this file except in compliance with
the License.
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
You may obtain a copy of the License at
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice,
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS,
and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
- Neither the name of the libjpeg-turbo Project nor
the names of its
See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this
limitations under the License.
software without specific prior written permission.
libpng
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS",
URL: http://libpng.org/
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in
the file png.h that is
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall
prevail.
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
162
this sentence.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
This code is released under the libpng license.
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Andreas Dilger, are derived
from libpng-0.88,
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.54,
November 12, 2015, are
and are distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as
Copyright (c) 2000-2002, 2004, 2006-2015 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, are
libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to
the list of
derived from libpng-1.0.6, and are distributed
according to the same
Contributing Authors:
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the
following individuals
added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Sam Bushell
Eric S. Raymond
Magnus Holmgren
Cosmin Truta
Greg Roelofs
Gilles Vollant
Tom Tanner
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
library or against infringement. There is no
warranty that our
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes
is defined as the following set of individuals:
or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire
Andreas Dilger
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
the user.
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are
derived from
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
libpng-0.96, and are distributed according to the
same disclaimer and
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed
or implied,
license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals
added to the list
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
of Contributing Authors:
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary,
Tom Lane
163
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Certified Open Source is
a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. OSI
has not addressed
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
the additional disclaimers inserted at version 1.0.7.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,
without fee, subject
November 12, 2015
to the following restrictions:
libsrtp
URL: https://github.com/cisco/libsrtp
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
/*
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such
and must not
*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.
be misrepresented as being the original source.
* All rights reserved.
*
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
source or altered source distribution.
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without
* are met:
*
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
END OF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE.
* copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following
* disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
* with the distribution.
boxes and the like:
*
* Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor
the names of its
printf("%s", png_get_copyright(NULL));
* contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the
* from this software without specific prior written
permission.
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
164
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
* FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
distribution.
* COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
* Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM
Project, nor the names
* INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
derived from this software without specific prior
written
* SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
permission.
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
*
*/
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
libusbx
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
URL: http://libusb.org
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
libvpx
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
URL: http://www.webmproject.org
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All
rights reserved.
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
WebP image encoder/decoder
URL: http://developers.google.com/speed/webp
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents)
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
------------------------------------
"These implementations" means the copyrightable
works that implement the WebM
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
codecs distributed by Google as part of the WebM
165
Project.
(the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
Google hereby grants to you a perpetual, worldwide,
non-exclusive, no-charge,
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import,
transfer, and otherwise
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
run, modify and propagate the contents of these
implementations of WebM, where
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
such license applies only to those patent claims, both
currently owned by
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Google and acquired in the future, licensable by
Google that are necessarily
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
infringed by these implementations of WebM. This
grant does not include claims
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
that would be infringed only as a consequence of
further modification of these
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
or agree to the institution of patent litigation or any
other patent
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
enforcement activity against any entity (including a
cross-claim or
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any of these
implementations of WebM
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
or any code incorporated within any of these
implementations of WebM
THE SOFTWARE.
constitute direct or contributory patent infringement,
or inducement of
libxslt
patent infringement, then any patent rights granted to
you under this License
URL: http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT
for these implementations of WebM shall terminate
as of the date such
Licence for libxslt except libexslt
litigation is filed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------libxml
URL: http://xmlsoft.org
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard. All Rights
Reserved.
Except where otherwise noted in the source code
(e.g. the files hash.c,
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
with different Copyright notices) all the files are:
of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
Copyright (C) 1998-2012 Daniel Veillard. All Rights
Reserved.
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
of this software and associated documentation files
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
166
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON-
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON-
NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the
authors shall not
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel
Veillard shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other deal-
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other deal-
ings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him.
ings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him.
---------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------
libyuv
URL: http://code.google.com/p/libyuv/
Licence for libexslt
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights
reserved.
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Thomas Broyer, Charlie
Bozeman and Daniel Veillard.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
All Rights Reserved.
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
met:
of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
167
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
the above copyright
// notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
distribution.
// * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
* Neither the name of Google nor the names of its
contributors may
// copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software
// in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
without specific prior written permission.
// distribution.
// * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
// contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// this software without specific prior written
permission.
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
//
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
// "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
// A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
// OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
// DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
// THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
linux-syscall-support
URL: http://code.google.com/p/linux-syscallsupport/
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
// Copyright 2015 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
//
LZ4 - Extremely fast compression
// Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
URL: https://code.google.com/p/lz4/
// modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
LZ4 Library
// met:
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet
//
All rights reserved.
//
* Redistributions of source code must retain
168
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification,
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
other materials provided with the distribution.
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Some parts of Mesa are copyrighted under the GNU
LGPL. See the
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Mesa/docs/COPYRIGHT file for details.
LZMA SDK
modp base64 decoder
URL: http://www.7-zip.org/sdk.html
URL: https://github.com/client9/stringencoders
LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain.
* MODP_B64 - High performance base64
encoder/decoder
mesa
* Version 1.3 -- 17-Mar-2006
URL: http://www.mesa3d.org/
* http://modp.com/release/base64
*
The default Mesa license is as follows:
* Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 Nick Galbreath -- nickg
[at] modp [dot] com
Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Brian Paul All Rights
Reserved.
* All rights reserved.
*
169
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
Mojo
URL: https://github.com/domokit/mojo
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
// Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
* met:
*
//
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
// Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
// modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
*
// met:
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
//
// * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
// notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
// * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
*
* Neither the name of the modp.com nor the
names of its
// copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
* contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from
// in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
* this software without specific prior written
permission.
// distribution.
*
// * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
// contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// this software without specific prior written
permission.
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
//
// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
// "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
// LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
// OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
// SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
// THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
170
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
// OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
mt19937ar
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
URL: http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~mmat/MT/MT2002/emt19937ar.html
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
A C-program for MT19937, with initialization
improved 2002/1/26.
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto
Matsumoto.
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
Before using, initialize the state by using
init_genrand(seed)
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
or init_by_array(init_key, key_length).
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto
and Takuji Nishimura,
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
All rights
reserved.
Netscape Plugin Application Programming Interface
(NPAPI)
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozillacentral/source/modules/plugin/base/public/
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
Software distributed under the License is distributed
on an "AS IS" basis,
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied. See the License
documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
3. The names of its contributors may not be
used to endorse or promote
The Original Code is mozilla.org code.
products derived from this software without
specific prior written
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
permission.
Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are
171
Copyright (C) 1998
* dl/sp/api/omxSP.h
the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
are licensed by Khronos:
Contributor(s):
Copyright © 2005-2008 The Khronos Group Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
These materials are protected by copyright laws and
contain material
the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or
later (the "LGPL"),
proprietary to the Khronos Group, Inc. You may use
these materials
in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL
are applicable instead
for implementing Khronos specifications, without
altering or removing
of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
any trademark, copyright or other notice from the
specification.
under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims
any, representations
use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
or warranties, express or implied, regarding these
materials, including,
decision by deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice
without limitation, any implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness
and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL.
If you do not delete
for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any
intellectual property.
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims
any, warranties, express
the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy,
completeness, timeliness,
OpenMAX DL
and reliability of these materials.
URL:
https://silver.arm.com/download/Software/Graphics/
OX000-BU-00010-r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU-00010
-r1p0-00bet0.tgz
Under no circumstances will the Khronos Group, or
any of its Promoters,
Contributors or Members or their respective partners,
officers, directors,
Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style
license that can be
employees, agents or representatives be liable for
any damages, whether
found in the LICENSE file in the root of the source
tree. All
direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for
lost revenues,
contributing project authors may be found in the
AUTHORS file in the
lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection
with these
root of the source tree.
The files were originally licensed by ARM Limited.
Khronos and OpenMAX are trademarks of the
Khronos Group Inc.
The following files:
opus
URL: http://git.xiph.org/?p=opus.git
* dl/api/omxtypes.h
Copyright 2001-2011 Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic,
172
Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy
B. Terriberry,
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell,
Mark Borgerding,
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Erik de Castro Lopo
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses
which are
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
specified at:
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1524/
are met:
Microsoft Corporation:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1914/
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Broadcom Corporation:
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1526/
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
OTS (OpenType Sanitizer)
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
URL: https://github.com/khaledhosny/ots.git
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
PLY (Python Lex-Yacc)
URL: http://www.dabeaz.com/ply/ply-3.4.tar.gz
- Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF
Trust, nor the
PLY (Python Lex-Yacc)
Version 3.4
names of specific contributors, may be used to
endorse or promote
Protocol Buffers
products derived from this software without specific
prior written
URL: http://protobuf.googlecode.com/svn/trunk
Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is
owned by the owner
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
of the input file used when generating it. This code is
not
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
standalone and requires a support library to be linked
with it. This
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
support library is itself covered by the above license.
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
Quick Color Management System
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
URL: https://github.com/jrmuizel/qcms/tree/v4
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
qcms
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
Copyright (C) 2009 Mozilla Corporation
Copyright (C) 1998-2007 Marti Maria
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
173
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
We try to make it clear that you may use all clipart
from Openclipart even for unlimited commercial use.
We believe that giving away our images is a great way
to share with the world our talents and that will come
back around in a better form.
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
May I Use Openclipart for?
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
We put together a small chart of as many possibilities
and questions we have heard from people asking
how they may use Openclipart. If you have an
additional question, please email
love@openclipart.org.
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
All Clipart are Released into the Public Domain.
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
Each artist at Openclipart releases all rights to the
images they share at Openclipart. The reason is so
that there is no friction in using and sharing images
authors make available at this website so that each
artist might also receive the same benefit in using
other artists clipart totally for any possible reason.
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO
SMHasher
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
URL: http://code.google.com/p/smhasher/
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Snappy: A fast compressor/decompressor
URL: http://google.github.io/snappy/
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
sqlite
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
URL: http://sqlite.org/
The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
In place of a legal notice, here is a blessing:
re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression
library
URL: https://github.com/google/re2
May you do good and not evil.
May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive
others.
sfntly
May you share freely, never taking more than you
give.
URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/sfntly
Skia
tcmalloc
URL: https://skia.org/
URL: http://gperftools.googlecode.com/
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The USB ID Repository
URL: http://www.linux-usb.org/usb-ids.html
Some files under resources are under the following
license:
Copyright (c) 2012, Linux USB Project
Unlimited Commercial Use
All rights reserved.
174
------------------------------Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Cisco Systems, Inc.
Copyright (c) 2002-12 Randall R. Stewart
Copyright (c) 2002-12 Michael Tuexen
o Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
All rights reserved.
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
are met:
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
o Neither the name of the Linux USB Project nor the
names of its
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
usrsctp
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
URL: http://github.com/sctplab/usrsctp
SUCH DAMAGE.
(Copied from the COPYRIGHT file of
wayland
https://code.google.com/p/sctprefimpl/source/browse/trunk/COPYRIGHT)
URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/
-------------------------------------------------
Copyright © 2008-2012 Kristian Høgsberg
175
Copyright © 2010-2012 Intel Corporation
Copyright © 2011 Benjamin Franzke
Copyright © 2008-2013 Kristian Høgsberg
Copyright © 2012 Collabora, Ltd.
Copyright © 2010-2013 Intel Corporation
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
Copyright © 2013
Rafael Antognolli
Copyright © 2013
Jasper St. Pierre
Copyright © 2014
Jonas Ådahl
Copyright © 2014
Jason Ekstrand
Copyright © 2014-2015 Collabora, Ltd.
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
Copyright © 2015
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
Red Hat Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
paragraph) shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
paragraph) shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
---
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License
used by X.org:
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN
G
---
The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License
used by X.org:
wayland-protocols
URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/
176
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN
G
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
Web Animations JS
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
URL: https://github.com/web-animations/webanimations-js
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
WebRTC
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
URL: http://www.webrtc.org
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All
rights reserved.
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
x86inc
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
URL:
http://git.videolan.org/?p=x264.git;a=blob;f=common/
x86/x86inc.asm
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
;*********************************************************
********************
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
;* x86inc.asm
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
;* Copyright (C) 2005-2011 x264 project
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
;* Authors: Loren Merritt
;*********************************************************
********************
;*
;*
Anton Mitrofanov
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
;*
Jason Garrett-Glaser
distribution.
;*
* Neither the name of Google nor the names of its
contributors may
;* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute
this software for any
be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software
;* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above
without specific prior written permission.
;* copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in all copies.
;*
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
;* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE
AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
;* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
;* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
177
;* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
arising from the use of this software.
;* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose,
;* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
including commercial applications, and to alter it
and redistribute it
;* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
;*********************************************************
********************
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If
you use this software
; This is a header file for the x264ASM assembly
language, which uses
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be
; NASM/YASM syntax combined with a large number
of macros to provide easy
appreciated but is not required.
; abstraction between different calling conventions
(x86_32, win64, linux64).
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must not be
; It also has various other useful features to simplify
writing the kind of
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from
any source distribution.
; DSP functions that are most often used in x264.
; Unlike the rest of x264, this file is available under an
ISC license, as it
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
; has significant usefulness outside of x264 and we
want it to be available
; to the largest audience possible. Of course, if you
modify it for your own
*/
; purposes to add a new feature, we strongly
encourage contributing a patch
url_parse
; as this feature might be useful for others as well.
Send patches or ideas
; to x264-devel@videolan.org .
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/comm-central/source/m
ozilla/netwerk/base/src/nsURLParsers.cpp
zlib
Copyright 2007, Google Inc.
URL: http://zlib.net/
All rights reserved.
/* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose
compression library
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
version 1.2.4, March 14th, 2010
met:
Copyright (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
warranty. In no event will the authors be held
liable for any damages
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
178
the above
on an "AS IS" basis,
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied. See the License
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
The Original Code is mozilla.org code.
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
this software without specific prior written permission.
Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1998
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
Contributor(s):
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
Darin Fisher (original author)
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or
later (the "LGPL"),
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL
are applicable instead
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
decision by deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL.
If you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
The file url_parse.cc is based on nsURLParsers.cc
from Mozilla. This file is
the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
licensed separately as follows:
V8 JavaScript Engine
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
URL: http://code.google.com/p/v8
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
This license applies to all parts of V8 that are not
externally
Software distributed under the License is distributed
maintained libraries. The externally maintained
179
libraries used by V8
reserved.
are:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
- PCRE test suite, located in
test/mjsunit/third_party/regexp-pcre/regexppcre.js. This is based on the
met:
test suite from PCRE-7.3, which is copyrighted by
the University
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
of Cambridge and Google, Inc. The copyright
notice and license
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
are embedded in regexp-pcre.js.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
- Layout tests, located in
test/mjsunit/third_party/object-keys. These are
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following
based on layout tests from webkit.org which are
copyrighted by
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
Apple Computer, Inc. and released under a
3-clause BSD license.
with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
- Strongtalk assembler, the basis of the files
assembler-arm-inl.h,
contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived
assembler-arm.cc, assembler-arm.h, assembleria32-inl.h,
from this software without specific prior
written permission.
assembler-ia32.cc, assembler-ia32.h, assemblerx64-inl.h,
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
assembler-x64.cc, assembler-x64.h, assemblermips-inl.h,
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
assembler-mips.cc, assembler-mips.h,
assembler.cc and assembler.h.
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
This code is copyrighted by Sun Microsystems
Inc. and released
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
under a 3-clause BSD license.
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
- Valgrind client API header, located at
third_party/valgrind/valgrind.h
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
This is release under the BSD license.
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
These libraries have their own licenses; we
recommend you read them,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
as their terms may differ from the terms below.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
Further license information can be found in LICENSE
files located in
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
sub-directories.
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright 2014, the V8 project authors. All rights
180
fdlibm
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
URL: http://www.netlib.org/fdlibm/
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
Copyright (C) 1993-2004 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc.
business.
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software is freely granted, provided that this notice
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
is preserved.
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
Strongtalk
URL: http://www.strongtalk.org/
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Copyright (c) 1994-2006 Sun Microsystems Inc.
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
All Rights Reserved.
Extra bundled binaries
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
name
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
libcap URL:
https://sites.google.com/site/fullycapable/
License
met:
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text
describes the
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
licensed conditions under which the contents of this
libcap release
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
may be used and distributed:
- Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
------------------------------------------------------------------------
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of
libcap, with
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following
- Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names
of contributors may
conditions are met:
be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without
notice, and this entire permission notice in its
entirety,
specific prior written permission.
including the disclaimer of warranties.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the
following
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
181
with the distribution.
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
products derived from this software without their
specific prior
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
written permission.
*
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed
under the terms of the
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
GNU General Public License (v2.0 - see below), in
which case the
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF
the above restrictions.
* License.
(This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict
*
between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained
in a BSD-style
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
*
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1994-2000
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
* Contributor(s):
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
* Rob Crittenden (rcritten@redhat.com)
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
libnsspem
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
*
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
URL: https://git.fedorahosted.org/cgit/nss-pem.git
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
182
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
Return to Documentation index.
© Opera TV AS 2015. Confidential information of
Opera TV.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
BSD LICENSE
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
______________________________
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
MIT LICENSE
this sentence.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
This code is released under the libpng license.
_____________________________
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in
the file png.h that is
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall
prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1,
February 25, 2010, are
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2007 Glenn RandersPehrson, and are
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.2.5
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to
with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to
the following conditions:
Cosmin Truta
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 October 3, 2002, are
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson,
and are
183
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
is defined as the following set of individuals:
library or against infringement. There is no
warranty that our
Andreas Dilger
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with
the user.
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed
or implied,
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and
are
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96,
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc.
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary,
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Tom Lane
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,
without fee, subject
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.88,
to the following restrictions:
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
be misrepresented as being the original source.
source or altered source distribution.
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
184
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without
Introduction
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
============
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages;
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
some of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or
relate to, the
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
FreeType Project.
boxes and the like:
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the
affects thus the FreeType font engine,
the test programs,
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
Certified Open Source is a
This license was inspired by the BSD,
Artistic, and IJG
certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
and use of free software in commercial and
freeware products
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
February 25, 2010
o We don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be
_____________________________
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution)
This software is based in part on the work of the
FreeType Team.
----------------------
o You can use this software for whatever you
want, in parts or
The FreeType Project
full form, without having to pay us. (`royaltyfree' usage)
LICENSE
----------------------------
o You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use
2006-Jan-27
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you
must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you have used the
Copyright 1996-2002,
2006 by
FreeType code. (`credits')
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg
185
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this
using the FreeType
engine'.
software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products.
This license applies to all files distributed in
the original
We disclaim all warranties covering The
FreeType Project and
FreeType Project, including all source
code, binaries and
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
documentation, unless otherwise stated in
the file in its
Finally, many people asked us for a
preferred form for a
original, unmodified form as distributed in the
original archive.
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this
license. We thus
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file
is covered by
encourage you to use the following text:
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
"""
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000
by David Turner,
Portions of this software are copyright ɠ
The FreeType
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
specified below.
"""
--------------
Please replace with the value from the
FreeType version you
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
actually use.
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
Legal Terms
===========
--------------
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project',
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE
USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of
files originally
distributed by the authors (David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and
----------------This license grants a worldwide, royaltyfree, perpetual and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they
named as alpha,
irrevocable right and license to use, execute,
perform, compile,
beta or final release.
display, copy, create derivative works of,
distribute and
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source
and object code
`using' is a generic term including compiling the
project's source
forms) and derivative works thereof for any
purpose; and to
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'.
authorize others to exercise some or all of the
rights granted
This program is referred to as `a program
186
herein, subject to the following conditions:
As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType
Project is copyrighted
o Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file
material, only this license, or another one
contracted with the
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute,
and modify it.
the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying
the FreeType
documentation. The copyright notices
of the unaltered,
Project, you indicate that you understand and
accept all the terms
original files must be preserved in all
copies of source
of this license.
files.
-----------
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the
o
freetype@nongnu.org
FreeType Team, in the distribution
documentation. We also
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType
web page in your
future and wanted additions to the library
and distribution.
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
If you are looking for support, start in this
list if you
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation.
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified
files. If you use
our work, you must acknowledge us. However,
no fee need be paid
o
freetype-devel@nongnu.org
to us.
Discusses bugs, as well as engine
internals, design issues,
--------------
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors
nor you shall use
Our home page can be found at
the name of the other for commercial, advertising,
or promotional
http://www.freetype.org
purposes without specific prior written permission.
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one
or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation
_____________________________
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
`FreeType Engine',
MOZILLA PUBLIC
LICENSE
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
Version 1.1
187
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to
grant, to the maximum
---------------
extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or
otherwise making the
subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights
conveyed herein.
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or
deletion from the
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates
or contributes to
substance or structure of either the Original
Code or any previous
the creation of Modifications.
Modifications. When Covered Code is released
as a series of files, a
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the
combination of the Original
Modification is:
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications
A. Any addition to or deletion from the
contents of a file
made by that particular Contributor.
containing Original Code or previous
Modifications.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or
Modifications or the
B. Any new file that contains any part of
the Original Code or
combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case
previous Modifications.
including portions thereof.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of
computer software code
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means
a mechanism generally
which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as
accepted in the software development
community for the electronic
Original Code, and which, at the time of its
release under this
transfer of data.
License is not already Covered Code governed
by this License.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any
form other than Source
Code.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent
claim(s), now owned or
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or
entity identified
hereafter acquired, including without
limitation, method, process,
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by Exhibit
and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable
by grantor.
A.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of
the Covered Code for
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which
combines Covered Code or
making modifications to it, including all modules
it contains, plus
portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
any associated interface definition files, scripts
used to control
compilation and installation of an Executable,
or source code
1.8. "License" means this document.
188
differential comparisons against either the
Original Code or another
selling of Original Code, to make, have
made, use, practice,
well known, available Covered Code of the
Contributor's choice. The
sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise
dispose of the
Source Code can be in a compressed or
archival form, provided the
Original Code (or portions thereof).
appropriate decompression or de-archiving
software is widely available
(c) the licenses granted in this Section
2.1(a) and (b) are
for no charge.
effective on the date Initial Developer
first distributes
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a
legal entity
Original Code under the terms of this
License.
exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above,
no patent license is
License or a future version of this License
issued under Section 6.1.
granted: 1) for code that You delete from
the Original Code; 2)
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity
which controls, is
separate from the Original Code; or 3)
for infringements caused
controlled by, or is under common control with
You. For purposes of
by: i) the modification of the Original
Code or ii) the
this definition, "control" means (a) the power,
direct or indirect,
combination of the Original Code with
other software or devices.
to cause the direction or management of such
entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more
than fifty percent
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property
claims, each Contributor
(50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such
hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
entity.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free,
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify,
non-exclusive license, subject to third party
intellectual property
display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Modifications
claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
created by such Contributor (or portions
thereof) either on an
trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce,
unmodified basis, with other
Modifications, as Covered Code
modify, display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Original
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the
making, using, or
as part of a Larger Work; and
selling of Modifications made by that
Contributor either alone
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the
making, using or
and/or in combination with its
Contributor Version (or portions
189
of such combination), to make, use, sell,
offer for sale, have
distribute. You may not offer or impose any
terms on any Source Code
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that
version that alters or restricts the applicable
version of this
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2)
the combination of
License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include
Modifications made by that Contributor
with its Contributor
an additional document offering the additional
rights described in
Version (or portions of such
combination).
Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a)
and 2.2(b) are
Any Modification which You create or to which
You contribute must be
effective on the date Contributor first
makes Commercial Use of
made available in Source Code form under the
terms of this License
the Covered Code.
either on the same media as an Executable
version or via an accepted
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b)
above, no patent license is
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to
whom you made an
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor
has deleted from the
Executable version available; and if made
available via Electronic
Contributor Version; 2) separate from
the Contributor Version;
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available
for at least twelve (12)
3) for infringements caused by: i) third
party modifications of
months after the date it initially became
available, or at least six
Contributor Version or ii) the
combination of Modifications made
(6) months after a subsequent version of that
particular Modification
by that Contributor with other software
(except as part of the
has been made available to such recipients.
You are responsible for
Contributor Version) or other devices; or
4) under Patent Claims
ensuring that the Source Code version remains
available even if the
infringed by Covered Code in the
absence of Modifications made by
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained
by a third party.
that Contributor.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
3.1. Application of License.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a
The Modifications which You create or to which
You contribute are
file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and
governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation
the date of any change. You must include a
prominent statement that
Section 2.2. The Source Code version of
Covered Code may be
the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly,
from Original
distributed only under the terms of this License
or a future version
Code provided by the Initial Developer and
including the name of the
of this License released under Section 6.1, and
You must include a
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b)
in any notice in an
copy of this License with every copy of the
Source Code You
Executable version or related documentation in
190
which You describe the
Modifications are Contributor's original
creation(s) and/or
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
this License.
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a
license under a third party's
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in
each file of the Source
intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights
Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in
a particular Source
granted by such Contributor under
Sections 2.1 or 2.2,
Code file due to its structure, then You must
include such notice in a
Contributor must include a text file with
the Source Code
location (such as a relevant directory) where a
user would be likely
distribution titled "LEGAL" which
describes the claim and the
to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more Modification(s)
party making the claim in sufficient detail
that a recipient will
You may add your name as a Contributor to the
notice described in
know whom to contact. If Contributor
obtains such knowledge after
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation
the Modification is made available as
described in Section 3.2,
for the Source Code where You describe
recipients' rights or ownership
Contributor shall promptly modify the
LEGAL file in all copies
rights relating to Covered Code. You may
choose to offer, and to
Contributor makes available thereafter
and shall take other steps
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability
(such as notifying appropriate mailing
lists or newsgroups)
obligations to one or more recipients of
Covered Code. However, You
reasonably calculated to inform those
who received the Covered
may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on
behalf of the Initial
Code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it
absolutely clear than
(b) Contributor APIs.
any such warranty, support, indemnity or
liability obligation is
If Contributor's Modifications include an
application programming
offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial
interface and Contributor has knowledge
of patent licenses which
Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by the
are reasonably necessary to implement
that API, Contributor must
Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result
of warranty,
also include this information in the
LEGAL file.
(c)
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
Representations.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
Contributor represents that, except as
disclosed pursuant to
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable
form only if the
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor
believes that Contributor's
requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met
for that Covered Code,
191
and if You include a notice stating that the
Source Code version of
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of
the terms of this
the Covered Code is available under the terms
of this License,
License with respect to some or all of the
Covered Code due to
including a description of how and where You
have fulfilled the
statute, judicial order, or regulation then You
must: (a) comply with
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be
conspicuously included
the terms of this License to the maximum extent
possible; and (b)
in any notice in an Executable version, related
documentation or
describe the limitations and the code they
affect. Such description
collateral in which You describe recipients'
rights relating to the
must be included in the LEGAL file described in
Section 3.4 and must
Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered
be included with all distributions of the Source
Code. Except to the
Code or ownership rights under a license of
Your choice, which may
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be
contain terms different from this License,
provided that You are in
sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to
compliance with the terms of this License and
that the license for the
understand it.
Executable version does not attempt to limit or
alter the recipient's
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has
rights in the Source Code version from the rights
set forth in this
attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
License. If You distribute the Executable version
under a different
6.1. New Versions.
license You must make it absolutely clear that
any terms which differ
Netscape Communications Corporation
("Netscape") may publish revised
from this License are offered by You alone, not
by the Initial
and/or new versions of the License from time to
time. Each version
Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree
to indemnify the
will be given a distinguishing version number.
Initial Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a
result of any such
Once Covered Code has been published under
a particular version of the
terms You offer.
License, You may always continue to use it
under the terms of that
3.7. Larger Works.
version. You may also choose to use such
Covered Code under the terms
You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code
of any subsequent version of the License
published by Netscape. No one
not governed by the terms of this License and
distribute the Larger
other than Netscape has the right to modify the
terms applicable to
Work as a single product. In such a case, You
must make sure the
Covered Code created under this License.
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the
Covered Code.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this
192
License (which you may
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware
of the breach. All
only do in order to apply it to code which is not
already Covered Code
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are
properly granted shall
governed by this License), You must (a) rename
Your license so that
survive any termination of this License.
Provisions which, by their
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape",
nature, must remain in effect beyond the
termination of this License
"MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase
do not appear in your
shall survive.
license (except to note that your license differs
from this License)
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a
patent infringement
and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your
version of the license
claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against Initial Developer
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public License and
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or
Contributor against whom
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of
the Initial
You file such action is referred to as
"Participant") alleging that:
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the
notice described in
Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to
be modifications of
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly
this License.)
infringes any patent, then any and all rights
granted by such
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2
of this License
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT
THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice
You either: (i)
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
royalty for Your past and future use of
Modifications made by such
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT,
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim
with respect to
YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE
the Contributor Version against such
Participant. If within 60 days
COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment
arrangement are not
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties
or the litigation claim
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
is not withdrawn, the rights granted by
Participant to You under
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate
at the expiration of
8.1. This License and the rights granted
hereunder will terminate
the 60 day notice period specified above.
automatically if You fail to comply with terms
herein and fail to cure
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other
193
than such Participant's
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF
SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
any rights granted to You by such Participant
under Sections 2.1(b)
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date
You first made, used,
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR
DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
Participant.
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim
against Participant
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
alleging that such Participant's Contributor
Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim
is resolved (such as
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as
that term is defined in
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of
patent
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer
infringement litigation, then the reasonable
value of the licenses
software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such
granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1
or 2.2 shall be taken
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48
into account in determining the amount or
value of any payment or
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4 (June 1995),
license.
all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered
Code with only those
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections
8.1 or 8.2 above,
rights set forth herein.
all end user license agreements (excluding
distributors and resellers)
This License represents the complete agreement
concerning subject
which have been validly granted by You or any
distributor hereunder
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is
held to be
prior to termination shall survive termination.
unenforceable, such provision shall be
reformed only to the extent
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
necessary to make it enforceable. This License
shall be governed by
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,
any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflictof-law provisions.
OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
With respect to disputes in which at least one
party is a citizen of,
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
or an entity chartered or registered to do
business in the United
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
States of America, any litigation relating to this
License shall be
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
194
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts
of the Northern
compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the License at
District of California, with venue lying in Santa
Clara County,
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
California, with the losing party responsible for
costs, including
Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS"
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the
expenses. The application of the United Nations
Convention on
License for the specific language governing
rights and limitations
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is
expressly excluded.
under the License.
Any law or regulation which provides that the
language of a contract
The Original Code is
______________________________________.
shall be construed against the drafter shall not
apply to this
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
________________________.
License.
Portions created by ______________________
are Copyright (C) ______
As between Initial Developer and the
Contributors, each party is
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
responsible for claims and damages arising,
directly or indirectly,
Contributor(s):
______________________________________.
out of its utilization of rights under this License
and You agree to
work with Initial Developer and Contributors to
distribute such
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be
used under the terms
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing
herein is intended or
of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the
shall be deemed to constitute any admission of
liability.
provisions of [______] License are applicable
instead of those
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as
above. If you wish to allow use of your version
of this file only
"Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed"
means that the Initial
under the terms of the [____] License and not to
allow others to use
Developer permits you to utilize portions of the
Covered Code under
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate
your decision by
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative
licenses, if any, specified
deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice and
by the Initial Developer in the file described in
Exhibit A.
other provisions required by the [___] License.
If you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
under either the MPL or the [___] License."
``The contents of this file are subject to the
Mozilla Public License
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ
slightly from the text of
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in
the notices in the Source Code files of the
195
Original Code. You should
use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text
found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your
Modifications.]
22.5
Announcements
You can receive an announcement on new TV
software available for download or other software
related issues.
To read these announcements…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Announcements.
3 - If there is an announcement, you can read it or
select one of the announcements available.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
196
When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product it means that the product is
covered by the European Directive 2012/19/EU.
23
Specifications
23.1
Environmental
Please inform yourself about the local separate
collection system for electrical and electronic
products.
Product Fiche
32PFS6402
• Energy Efficiency Class : A
• Visible Screen Size : 80 cm / 32 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 34 W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 50 kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) ** : 0.30 W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 1920 x 1080p
Please act according to your local rules and do not
dispose of your old products with your normal
household waste. Correct disposal of your old
product helps to prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human
health.
43PUS64x2
• Energy Efficiency Class : A
• Visible Screen Size : 108 cm / 43 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 67 W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 98 kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) ** : 0.30 W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 3840 x 2160p
Your product contains batteries covered by the
European Directive 2006/66/EC, which cannot be
disposed with normal household waste.
49PUS64x2
• Energy Efficiency Class : A
• Visible Screen Size : 123 cm / 49 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 87 W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 127 kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) ** : 0.30 W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 3840 x 2160p
Please find out for yourself about the local rules on
separate collection of batteries because correct
disposal will help to prevent negative consequences
for the environment and human health.
23.2
55PUS64x2
• Energy Efficiency Class : A
• Visible Screen Size : 139 cm / 55 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 91 W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 133 kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) ** : 0.30 W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 3840 x 2160p
Power
Product specifications are subject to change without
notice. For more specification details of this product,
see www.philips.com/support
* Energy consumption kWh per year, based on the
power consumption of the television operating 4
hours per day for 365 days. The actual energy
consumption depends on how the television is used.
Power
• Mains power : AC 220-240V +/-10%
• Ambient temperature : 5°C to 35°C
• Power saving features : Eco mode, Picture mute (for
radio), Auto switch-off timer, Eco settings menu.
** When the TV is turned off with the remote control
and no function is active.
For power consumption information, see
chapter Product Fiche.
End of Use
The power rating stated on the product typeplate is
the power consumption for this product during
normal household use (IEC 62087 Ed.2). The
maximum power rating, stated between brackets, is
used for electrical safety (IEC 60065 Ed. 7.2).
Disposal of your old product and batteries
Your product is designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be
recycled and reused.
197
• 1360 x 765p - 60 Hz
• 1360 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz
• 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz
23.3
Operating System
Android OS :
Android Lollipop 5.1
23.7
Dimensions and Weights
23.4
Reception
32PFS6402
• without TV stand:
Width 726.5 mm - Height 438.7 mm - Depth 76.8 mm
- Weight ± 5.63 kg
• with TV stand:
Width 726.5 mm - Height 483.3 mm - Depth 168.7
mm - Weight ± 5.89 kg
• Aerial input : 75 ohm coaxial (IEC75)
• Tuner bands : Hyperband, S-Channel, UHF, VHF
• DVB : DVB-T2 (support HEVC), DVB-C (cable) QAM
• Analogue video playback : SECAM, PAL
• Digital video playback : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC
13818-2), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 14496-10)
• Digital audio playback (ISO/IEC 13818-3)
• Satellite aerial input : 75 ohm F-type
• Input frequency range : 950 to 2150MHz
• Input level range : 25 to 65 dBm
• DVB-S/S2 QPSK, symbol rate 2 to 45M symbols,
SCPC and MCPC
• LNB : DiSEqC 1.0, 1 to 4 LNBs supported, Polarity
selection 14/18V, Band selection 22kHz, Tone burst
mode, LNB current 300mA max
43PUS64x2
• without TV stand:
Width 968.2 mm - Height 575.7 mm - Depth 76.8 mm
- Weight ± 9.38 kg
• with TV stand:
Width 968.2 mm - Height 623.3 mm - Depth 204.2
mm - Weight ± 9.69 kg
49PUS64x2
• without TV stand:
Width 1099.2 mm - Height 645.3 mm - Depth 78.6
mm - Weight ± 11.01 kg
• with TV stand:
Width 1099.2 mm - Height 699.7 mm - Depth 213.2
mm - Weight ± 11.31 kg
23.5
Display Type
55PUS64x2
• without TV stand:
Width 1239.2 mm - Height 724.7 mm - Depth 84.8 mm
- Weight ± 16 kg
• with TV stand:
Width 1239.2 mm - Height 779.5 mm - Depth 231.7
mm - Weight ± 16.3 kg
Diagonal screen size
• 32PFS6402 : 80 cm / 32 inch
Display resolution
• 1920 x 1080p
23.6
Display Input Resolution
23.8
Video formats
Connectivity
Resolution — Refresh rate
TV Side
• HDMI 3 in - ARC
• HDMI 4 in - MHL - ARC
• USB 2 - USB 3.0 (blue)
• USB 3 - USB 2.0
• 1x Common Interface slot: CI+/CAM
• Headphones - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm
• 480i - 60 Hz
• 480p - 60 Hz
• 576i - 50 Hz
• 576p - 50 Hz
• 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz
Resolutions (amongst others)
TV Rear
• Audio In (DVI to HDMI) - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm
• SCART: Audio L/R, CVBS in, RGB
• YPbPr : Y Pb Pr, Audio L/R
• 640 x 480p - 60 Hz
• 800 x 600p - 60 Hz
• 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz
TV Bottom
• HDMI 1 in
• HDMI 2 in
• USB 1 - USB 2.0
Computer formats
198
• Audio out - Optical Toslink
• Network LAN - RJ45
• Antenna (75 ohm)
• Satellite tuner
• You can use the Philips TV Remote app (iOS and
Android) on mobile devices.
Performance may vary, depending on the capabilities
of the mobile device and the software used.
23.9
Sound
• wOOx
• HD Stereo
• Output power (RMS) : 16W
• Dolby Digital Plus®
• DTS 2.0 + Digital out ™
23.10
Multimedia
Connections
• USB 2.0 / USB 3.0
• Ethernet LAN RJ-45
• Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n (built-in)
• BT2.1 with EDR & BT4.0 with BLE
Supported USB file systems
• FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS
Playback formats
• Containers : 3GP, AVCHD, AVI, MPEG-PS, MPEG-TS,
MPEG-4, Matroska (MKV), Quicktime (MOV, M4V,
M4A), Windows Media (ASF/WMV/WMA)
• Video Codecs : MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4 Part 2,
MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC (H264), H.265 (HEVC), VC-1,
WMV9
• Audio Codecs : AAC, HE-AAC (v1/v2), AMR-NB,
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS Premium
Sound™, MPEG-1/2/2.5 Layer I/II/III (includes MP3),
WMA (v2 to v9.2), WMA Pro (v9/v10)
• Subtitles :
– Formats : SAMI, SubRip (SRT), SubViewer (SUB),
MicroDVD (TXT), mplayer2 (TXT), TMPlayer (TXT)
– Character encodings : UTF-8, Central Europe and
Eastern Europe (Windows-1250), Cyrillic
(Windows-1251), Greek (Windows-1253), Turkish
(Windows-1254), Western Europe (Windows-1252)
• Image Codecs : JPEG, PNG, BMP
• Limitations :
– Maximum supported total bit rate for a media file is
30Mbps.
– Maximum supported video bit rate for a media file
is 20Mbps.
– MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) is supported up to High
Profile @ L5.1.
– H.265 (HEVC) is supported upto Main / Main 10
Profile up to Level 5.1
– VC-1 is supported up to Advanced Profile @ L3.
Supported media server software (DMS)
• You can use any DLNA V1.5 certified media server
software (DMS class).
199
creaking sound is due to the normal expansion and
contraction of the TV as it cools and warms up. This
does not affect performance.
24
Help and Support
TV does not respond to the remote control
24.1
The TV requires some time to start up. During this
time, the TV does not respond to the remote control
or TV controls. This is normal behaviour.
If the TV continues to be unresponsive to the remote
control, you can check if the remote control is working
by means of a mobile phone camera. Put the phone
in camera mode and point the remote control to the
camera lens. If you press any key on the remote
control and you notice the infra red LED flicker
through the camera, the remote control is working.
The TV needs to be checked.
If you do not notice the flickering, the remote control
might be broken or its batteries are low.
This method of checking the remote control is not
possible with remote controls which are wirelessly
paired with the TV.
Register your TV
Register your TV and enjoy a range of benefits
including full support (including downloads),
privileged access to information about new products,
exclusive offers and discounts, the chance to win
prizes and even participate in special surveys about
new releases.
Go to www.philips.com/welcome
24.2
Using Help
This TV offers help on screen .
Open Help
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Select Settings > Help >
The TV goes back to standby after showing the
Philips startup screen
You can also open Help in the Home menu or
TV menu.
When the TV is disconnected and reconnected to the
power supply in standby mode, the startup screen is
displayed and then the TV returns to standby mode.
This is normal behaviour. To switch on the TV from
standby mode again, press on the remote control
or on the TV.
Before you execute the Help instructions, close Help.
The standby light keeps on blinking
For some activities, like Text (Teletext), the colour
keys have specific functions and cannot open Help.
Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait 5 minutes before you reconnect the power
cable. If the blinking reoccurs, contact Philips TV
Consumer Care.
User manual.
To read the Help as a book, select Book. To search
for a keyword, select Keyword.
TV Help on your tablet, smartphone or computer
To carry out extended sequences of instructions more
easily, you can download the TV Help in PDF format
to read on your smartphone, tablet or
computer. Alternatively, you can print the relevant
Help page from your computer.
To download the Help (user manual) go
to www.philips.com/support
Channels
No digital channels found during the installation
See the technical specifications to make sure that
your TV supports DVB-T or DVB-C in your country.
Make sure that all cables are properly connected and
that the correct network is selected.
24.3
Troubleshooting
Previously installed channels are not in the channel
Switch On and Remote Control
Make sure that the correct channel list is selected.
list
The TV does not switch on
• Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait for one minute then reconnect it.
• Make sure that the power cable is securely
connected.
Creaking sound at startup or switch off
When you are switching the TV on, off or to standby,
you hear a creaking sound from the TV chassis. The
200
• Make sure that the volume is not muted or set to
zero.
• Make sure that the TV audio output is connected to
the audio input on the Home Theatre System.
Sound should be heard from the HTS speakers.
• Some devices may require you to manually enable
HDMI audio output. If HDMI audio is already enabled,
but you still do not hear audio, try changing the digital
audio format of the device to PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation). Refer to the documentation
accompanying your device for instructions.
Picture
No picture / distorted picture
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Make sure that the correct device is selected as the
display source.
• Make sure that the external device or source is
properly connected.
Sound but no picture
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Poor antenna reception
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Loud speakers, unearthed audio devices, neon
lights, high buildings and other large objects can
influence reception quality. If possible, try to improve
the reception quality by changing the antenna
direction or moving devices away from the TV.
• If reception on only one channel is poor, fine-tune
this channel with Manual Installation.
HDMI and USB
HDMI
• Note that HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) support can delay the time taken for a TV
to display content from an HDMI device.
• If the TV does not recognise the HDMI device and
no picture is displayed, switch the source from one
device to another and back again.
• If there are intermittent sound disruptions, make
sure that output settings from the HDMI device are
correct.
• If you use an HDMI-to-DVI adapter or HDMI-to-DVI
cable, make sure that an additional audio cable is
connected to AUDIO IN (mini-jack only), if available.
Poor picture from a device
• Make sure that the device is connected properly.
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Picture settings change after a while
Make sure that Location is set to Home . You can
change and save settings in this mode.
HDMI EasyLink does not work
• Make sure that your HDMI devices are HDMI-CEC
compatible. EasyLink features only work with devices
that are HDMI-CEC compatible.
A commercial banner appears
Make sure that Location is set to
Home.
Picture does not fit the screen
No volume icon shown
• When an HDMI-CEC audio device is connected and
you use the TV Remote Control to adjust the volume
level from the device, this behaviour is normal.
Photos, videos and music from a USB device do not
Change to a different picture format.
Picture format keeps changing with different
channels
show
• Make sure that the USB storage device is set to Mass
Storage Class compliant, as described in the storage
device's documentation.
• Make sure that the USB storage device is compatible
with the TV.
• Make sure that the audio and picture file formats are
supported by the TV.
Select a non 'Auto' picture format.
Picture position is incorrect
Picture signals from some devices may not fit the
screen correctly. Check the signal output of the
connected device.
Computer picture is not stable
Choppy playback of USB files
• The transfer performance of the USB storage device
may limit the data transfer rate to the TV which
causes poor playback.
Make sure that your PC uses the supported resolution
and refresh rate.
Sound
No sound or poor sound quality
If no audio signal is detected, the TV automatically
switches the audio output off — this does not indicate
malfunction.
• Make sure that the sound settings are correctly set.
• Make sure that all cables are properly connected.
201
Wi-Fi
Internet
Wi-Fi network not found or distorted
• Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi
802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb
the wireless network.
• We recommend using the 5 GHz frequency
(802.11ac) on your router when your TV is placed in
the neighborhood of many other wireless routers
(apartments, etc.).
• Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow
access to the TV's wireless connection.
• For easy installation of your wireless network, do not
hide the name of your router by switching off the
SSID broadcast.
• If the wireless network does not work properly in
your home, you can use the wired network
installation.
Internet does not work
• If the connection with the router is OK, check the
router connection to the Internet.
Wi-Fi network connection is slow
• Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection
for your router.
• Limit the amount of devices that use the same
router.
• Look in your wireless router's user manual for
information on indoor range, transfer rate and other
factors of signal quality.
24.4
Wrong Menu Language
Change the language back to your language.
1 - Press .
2 - Select the icon (Settings) and press OK.
3 - Press 5 times (down).
4 - Press 3 times (right), select your language and
press OK.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Online Help
To solve any Philips TV related problem, you can
consult our online support. You can select your
language and enter your product model number.
Go to www.philips.com/support .
DHCP
• If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the
router. DHCP should be switched on.
On the support site you can find your country's
telephone number to contact us as well as answers to
frequently asked questions (FAQs). In some countries,
you can chat with one of our collaborators and ask
your question directly or send a question by email.
You can download new TV software or the manual to
read on your computer.
Bluetooth
Unable to pair
• Make sure the device is in pairing mode. Read the
user manual of the device.
• Keep the router and wireless speaker as close to the
TV as possible.
• Places with a high amount of wireless activity apartments with lots of wireless routers - can hamper
the wireless connection.
• Trying to pair several devices with the TV at the
same time, may not work.
24.5
Support and Repair
For support and repair, call the Consumer Care
hotline in your country. Our service engineers will take
care of a repair, if necessary.
Find the telephone number in the printed
documentation that came with the TV.
Or consult our
website www.philips.com/support and select your
country if needed.
Bluetooth lost connection
• Always position the wireless speaker within a range
of 5 meters from the TV.
Bluetooth Audio and Video syncronisation
• Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker,
inform yourself about its quality of Audio to Video
syncronisation, commonly called 'lip sync'. Not all
Bluetooth devices perform correctly. Ask your dealer
for advice.
TV model number and serial number
You might be asked to provide the TV product model
number and serial number. Find these numbers on
the packaging label or on the type label on the back
or bottom of the TV.
Warning
Do not attemp to repair the TV yourself. This may
cause severe injury, irrepairable damage to your TV or
void your warranty.
202
ensure that the power voltage matches the value
printed on the back of the TV. Never connect the TV
to the power outlet if the voltage is different.
25
Safety and Care
25.1
Risk of Injury to Children
Safety
Follow these precautions to prevent the TV from
toppling over and causing injury to children:
Important
• Never place the TV on a surface covered by a cloth
or other material that can be pulled away.
• Ensure that no part of the TV hangs over the edge of
the mounting surface.
• Never place the TV on tall furniture, such as a
bookcase, without anchoring both the furniture and
TV to the wall or a suitable support.
• Teach children about the dangers of climbing on
furniture to reach the TV.
Read and understand all safety instructions before
you use the TV. If damage is caused by failure to
follow instructions, the warranty does not apply.
Risk of Electric Shock or Fire
• Never expose the TV to rain or water. Never place
liquid containers, such as vases, near the TV.
If liquids are spilt on or into the TV, disconnect the TV
from the power outlet immediately.
Contact Philips TV Consumer Care to have the TV
checked before use.
• Never expose the TV, remote control or batteries to
excessive heat. Never place them near burning
candles, naked flames or other heat sources,
including direct sunlight.
• Never insert objects into the ventilation slots or other
openings on the TV.
• Never place heavy objects on the power cord.
• Avoid force coming onto power plugs. Loose power
plugs can cause arcing or fire. Ensure that no strain is
exerted on the power cord when you swivel the TV
screen.
• To disconnect the TV from the mains power, the
power plug of the TV must be disconnected. When
disconnecting the power, always pull the power plug,
never the cord. Ensure that you have full access to
the power plug, power cord and outlet socket at all
times.
Risk of swallowing batteries !
The remote control may contain coin-type batteries
which can easily be swallowed by small children.
Keep these batteries out of reach of children at all
times.
Risk of Overheating
Never install the TV in a confined space. Always leave
a space of at least 10 cm or 4 inches around the TV
for ventilation. Ensure curtains or other objects never
cover the ventilation slots on the TV.
Lightning Storms
Disconnect the TV from the power outlet and antenna
before lightning storms.
During lightning storms, never touch any part of the
TV, power cord or antenna cable.
Risk of Injury or Damage to the TV
Risk of Hearing Damage
• Two people are required to lift and carry a TV that
weighs more than 25 kg or 55 lbs.
• If you mount the TV on a stand, only use the
supplied stand. Secure the stand to the TV tightly.
Place the TV on a flat, level surface that can support
the weight of the TV and the stand.
• When wall mounted, ensure that the wall mount can
safely bear the weight of the TV set. TP Vision bears
no responsibility for improper wall mounting that
results in accident, injury or damage.
• Parts of this product are made of glass. Handle with
care to avoid injury or damage.
Avoid using earphones or headphones at high
volumes or for prolonged periods of time.
Low Temperatures
If the TV is transported in temperatures below 5°C or
41°F, unpack the TV and wait until the TV temperature
reaches room temperature before connecting the TV
to the power outlet.
Risk of damage to the TV !
Before you connect the TV to the power outlet,
203
Humidity
In rare occasions, depending on temperature and
humidity, minor condensation can occur on the inside
of the TV glass front (on some models). To prevent
this, do not expose the TV to direct sunlight, heat or
extreme humidity. If condensation occurs, it will
disappear spontaneously while the TV is playing for a
few hours.
The condensation moisture will not harm the TV or
cause malfunction.
25.2
Screen Care
• Never touch, push, rub or strike the screen with any
object.
• Unplug the TV before cleaning.
• Clean the TV and frame with a soft damp cloth and
wipe gently. Avoid touching the Ambilight LEDs on
the backside of the TV. Never use substances such as
alcohol, chemicals or household cleaners on the TV.
• To avoid deformations and colour fading, wipe off
water drops as quickly as possible.
• Avoid stationary images as much as possible.
Stationary images are images that remain onscreen
for extended periods of time. Stationary images
include onscreen menus, black bars, time displays,
etc. If you must use stationary images, reduce screen
contrast and brightness to avoid screen damage.
204
more, black dots or bright points of light (red, green or
blue) may appear constantly on the screen. This is a
structural property of the display (within common
industry standards) and is not a malfunction.
26
Terms of Use
26.1
CE compliance
Hereby, TP Vision Europe B.V. declares that this
television is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directives 2014/53/EU (RED), 2009/125/EC (Eco
Design), 2010/30/ EU (Energy Labelling) and
2011/65/EC (RoHS).
Terms of Use - TV
2016 © TP Vision Europe B.V. All rights reserved.
This product was brought to the market by TP Vision
Europe B.V. or one of its affiliates, hereinafter referred
to as TP Vision, which is the manufacturer of the
product. TP Vision is the warrantor in relation to the
TV with which this booklet was packaged. Philips and
the Philips Shield Emblem are registered trademarks
of Koninklijke Philips N.V.
Compliance with EMF
TP Vision manufactures and sells many products
targeted at consumers which, like any electronic
apparatus, in general have the ability to emit and
receive electromagnetic signals. One of TP Vision’s
leading business principles is to take all necessary
health and safety measures for our products, to
comply with all applicable legal requirements and to
stay well within the Electro Magnetic Field (EMF)
standards applicable at the time of producing the
products.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V
or their respective owners. TP Vision reserves the right
to change products at any time without being obliged
to adjust earlier supplies accordingly.
The written material packaged with the TV and the
manual stored in the memory of the TV or
downloaded from the Philips
website www.philips.com/support are believed to
be adequate for the intended use of the system.
TP Vision is committed to developing, producing and
marketing products that cause no adverse health
effects. TP Vision confirms that, as long as its products
are handled properly for their intended use, they are
safe to use according to scientific evidence available
today. TP Vision plays an active role in the
development of international EMF and safety
standards, enabling TP Vision to anticipate further
developments in standardisation for early integration
in its products.
The material in this manual is believed adequate for
the intended use of the system. If the product, or its
individual modules or procedures, are used for
purposes other than those specified herein,
confirmation of their validity and suitability must be
obtained. TP Vision warrants that the material itself
does not infringe any United States patents. No
further warranty is expressed or implied. TP Vision
cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in
the content of this document nor for any problems as
a result of the content in this document. Errors
reported to Philips will be adapted and published on
the Philips support website as soon as possible.
26.2
Terms of Use - Philips App
Gallery
For more information, in Help, select Keywords and
look up Terms of Use, App Gallery for more
information.
Terms of warranty - Risk of injury, damage to TV or
void of warranty!
Never attempt to repair the TV yourself. Use the TV
and accessories only as intended by the
manufacturer. The caution sign printed on the back of
the TV indicates risk of electric shock. Never remove
the TV cover. Always contact Philips TV Customer
Care for service or repairs. Find the telephone number
in the printed documentation that came with the
TV. Or consult our
website www.philips.com/support and select your
country if needed. Any operation expressly prohibited
in this manual, or any adjustments and assembly
procedures not recommended or authorised in this
manual, shall void the warranty.
Pixel characteristics
This LCD/LED product has a high number of colour
pixels. Although it has effective pixels of 99.999% or
205
27
Copyrights
27.1
27.5
MHL
Microsoft
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
Windows Media
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
27.2
Microsoft PlayReady
HDMI
Content owners use Microsoft PlayReady™ content
access technology to protect their intellectual
property, including copyrighted content.
This device uses PlayReady technology to access
PlayReady-protected content and/or WMDRMprotected content. If the device fails to properly
enforce restrictions on content usage, content owners
may require Microsoft to revoke the device's ability to
consume PlayReady-protected content. Revocation
should not affect unprotected content or content
protected by other content access technologies.
Content owners may require you to upgrade
PlayReady to access their content. If you decline an
upgrade, you will not be able to access content that
requires the upgrade.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
27.3
Dolby Audio
27.6
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Wi-Fi Alliance
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
27.4
DTS 2.0+Digital Out ™
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS
2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
206
27.7
Kensington
(If applicable)
Kensington and Micro Saver are registered US
trademarks of ACCO World Corporation with issued
registrations and pending applications in other
countries throughout the world.
27.8
Other Trademarks
All other registered and unregistered trademarks are
the property of their respective owners.
207
28
Disclaimer regarding
services and/or
software offered by
third parties
Services and/or software offered by third parties may
be changed, suspended, or terminated without prior
notice. TP Vision does not bear any responsibility in
these sorts of situations.
208
Index
A
Age Rating 19
Ambilight, Settings 52
Android Settings 36
Announcements 196
Antenna Connection 7
APP lock 39
APP, Voice Search 9
Apps 38
Audio Description 59
Auto Volume Levelling 50
B
Bass 50
Batteries, Remote Control 10
Bluetooth 27
Bluetooth, Pairing 27
Bluetooth, Remove device 28
Bluetooth, Select device 28
Brightness 47
C
Camcorder, connect 31
Channel 17
Channel List Copy 16
Channel List Copy, copy 16
Channel List Copy, current version 17
Channel List Copy, upload 17
Channel, age rating 19
Channel, Channel List, about 17
Channel, Channel List, filter 18
Channel, Channel List, open 18
Channel, Channel List, search 18
Channel, Satellite Installation 12
Channel, switch to a channel 18
Colour 46
Colour Enhancement 47
Colour Temperature 47
Computer, connect 31
Connectivity Guide 23
Consumer Care 202
Contrast 46
Contrast Mode 48
Contrast, Dynamic Contrast 48
Contrast, Video Contrast 48
Custom Colour Temperature 47
D
Disposal of TV or Batteries 197
DMR, Digital Media Renderer 35
E
EasyLink 24
Eco Settings 54
End of use 197
G
Game Console, connect 28
Gamepad, connect 29
Gamma 48
Google Play Store 39
H
Hard of Hearing 59
HDMI MHL 23
HDMI, ARC 23
HDMI-DVI connection 24
Headphone Volume 50
Headphones, connect 28
Hearing impaired 59
Home Menu 37
I
Internet memory, clear 34
M
Media Files, from a Cloud Storage 61
Media Files, from a Computer or NAS 61
Media Files, from a USB Drive 61
MPEG Artefact Reduction 48
Multi View 75
N
Network Installation 33
Network, Clear Internet Memory 35
Network, connect 33
Network, settings 34
Network, Static IP 34
Network, Switch on Wi-Fi 35
Network, View Settings 34
Network, Wi-Fi Smart Screen 35
Network, Wired 34
Network, Wireless 33
Network, WoWLAN 34
Network, WPS 33
Network, WPS with PIN code 33
Noise Reduction 48
Now on TV 72
O
Online support 202
P
Parental Rating 19
Partially Sighted 59
Pause TV 67
Philips Logo, Brightness 55
Photo camera, connect 31
Photos, Videos and Music 61
Picture Format 49
Picture Style 46
Placement, TV placement 6
Placement, Viewing distance 6
Power Connection 6
Power Off 11
Power On 11
Problem, HDMI Connection 201
Problem, USB Connection 201
Problems, Menu language 202
Problems, Picture 201
Problems, Remote Control 200
Problems, Sound 201
Programmes, Recommendations 72
Q
Quick Picture Setting 49
209
R
Remote Control, IR Sensor 10
Remote Control, Overview 8
S
Safety Instructions 203
Satellite CAMs 12
Satellite Connection 7
Satellite Installation 12
Satellite, Add Satellite 13
Satellite, Channel packages 12
Satellite, Manual Channel Update 13
Satellite, Manual Installation 14
Satellite, Remove Satellite 13
Satellite, Unicable 13
Screen Care 204
Sharpness 47
Sleep Timer 59
Sound Style 49
Sound, Auto Volume Levelling 50
Standby Mode 11
Super Resolution 48
Switch Off Timer 54
T
Teletext 21
Terms of Use 205
Terms of Use, App Gallery 36
Treble 50
TV Guide Data 64
TV Network Name 35
TV on Demand 72
U
Unicable 13
Universal Access 59
Update Software 76
USB Flash Drive 31
USB Hard Drive, Installation 29
USB Keyboard 30
V
Video on Demand 72
Video Selection 20
Visually impaired 59
Voice Search, APP 9
W
Watch TV 18
Wi-Fi 33
Wired Network 34
Wireless Network 33
Y
YPbPr cConnection, Tips 24
210
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
211
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf Linearized : No Warning : Duplicate 'PageMode' entry in dictionary (ignored) PDF Version : 1.7 Page Count : 211 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Format : application/pdf Title : User Manual Creator : Philips Description : User Manual Subject : TCPDF Create Date : 2017:06:09 09:28:44+08:00 Creator Tool : TCPDF Modify Date : 2017:06:09 09:28:44+08:00 Metadata Date : 2017:06:09 09:28:44+08:00 Keywords : TCPDF Producer : TCPDF 6.0.037 (http://www.tcpdf.org) Document ID : uuid:8323469e-2713-e330-daba-22842a178a79 Instance ID : uuid:8323469e-2713-e330-daba-22842a178a79 Schemas Namespace URI : http://ns.adobe.com/pdf/1.3/ Schemas Prefix : pdf Schemas Schema : Adobe PDF Schema Schemas Property Category : internal Schemas Property Description : UUID based identifier for specific incarnation of a document Schemas Property Name : InstanceID Schemas Property Value Type : URI Author : Philips Trapped : FalseEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools